1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8366 \begin_layout Standard
8371 environment is identical to
8375 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8383 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8388 \begin_layout Section
8389 Nesting Environments
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 Nesting ! Environments
8400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8409 \begin_layout Subsection
8413 \begin_layout Standard
8415 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8417 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8419 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8421 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8456 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8457 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8465 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8477 \begin_inset space ~
8482 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8484 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8487 arg "depth-increment"
8493 arg "depth-decrement"
8507 arg "depth-increment"
8513 arg "depth-decrement"
8517 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8518 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8522 \begin_layout Standard
8523 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8524 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8525 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8526 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8527 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8533 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8535 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8538 \begin_layout Subsection
8539 What You Can and Can't Nest
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8544 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8549 than a simple yes or no.
8550 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Completely unnestable
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8569 environments have them:
8572 \begin_layout Description
8573 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8574 Can't nest into them.
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Description
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8614 Nestable You can nest them.
8615 You can nest other things into them.
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Description
8682 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8683 You can't nest anything into them.
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_inset space ~
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8801 \begin_inset space ~
8804 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8805 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8806 nested section headings violate this.
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8815 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8816 \begin_inset Index idx
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8820 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8830 affected by nesting anyhow.
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8856 Figures and tables in
8860 are not affected by this.
8865 Have a look at section
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8872 reference "sec:Floats"
8876 for more information about
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8885 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8886 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8899 of its own, it behaves just like a
8900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8907 paragraph environment.
8908 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8913 Here's an example with a table:
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 This is (a) and it's nested.
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8935 \begin_inset Tabular
8936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9051 This is (a) and it's nested.
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9056 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9064 \begin_inset Tabular
9065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9166 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9182 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 This is (a) and it's nested.
9194 \begin_layout Standard
9195 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset Tabular
9204 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9205 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9299 \begin_layout Enumerate
9301 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 \begin_layout Standard
9313 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9319 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9320 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9324 \begin_layout Subsection
9325 Usage and General Features
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9330 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9339 is the innermost possible depth.
9340 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 level #1 – outermost
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Standard
9378 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9379 both of them in the example.
9380 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9390 For example, if we tried to nest another
9395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9402 , we would get errors.
9405 \begin_layout Subsection
9407 \begin_inset Index idx
9410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9419 \begin_layout Standard
9420 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9421 We have several examples of nested environments.
9422 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9427 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #2-a This is level #2.
9444 We created it by using
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-a This is level #3.
9463 This time, we just enter
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9474 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9478 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9484 arg "depth-increment"
9491 \begin_layout Standard
9496 environment, nested inside of
9497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9505 So, it's at level #4.
9506 We did this by entering
9509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9515 arg "depth-increment"
9518 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9523 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9539 \begin_layout Standard
9544 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9547 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9553 \begin_layout Labeling
9554 \labelwidthstring MMM
9555 #4-a This is level #4.
9559 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9562 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9567 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9571 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9576 keep nesting things inside
9577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9588 \begin_layout Labeling
9589 \labelwidthstring MMM
9590 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9598 and this is level #6.
9599 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9605 #5-b Back to level #5.
9609 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9615 arg "depth-decrement"
9622 \begin_layout Labeling
9623 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 , we're back at level #4.
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #3-b Back to level #3.
9643 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9647 \begin_layout Labeling
9648 \labelwidthstring MMM
9649 #2-b Back to level #2.
9654 \begin_layout Labeling
9655 \labelwidthstring MMM
9656 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9657 After this sentence, we will enter
9661 and change the paragraph environment back to
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9669 We could have also used the
9685 environment in place of the
9690 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9694 Example 2: Inheritance
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9698 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9701 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9710 arg "depth-increment"
9714 \begin_inset Newline newline
9717 which, we will change to the
9725 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 environment, at level #2.
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 Notice how the nested
9738 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9742 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9746 \begin_layout Standard
9747 We ended this example by entering
9752 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9756 and reset the nesting depth by using
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9766 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9775 \begin_inset Argument 1
9778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9779 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9787 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 This is level #1, in an
9792 paragraph environment.
9793 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9797 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9808 arg "depth-increment"
9812 Now, what happens if we nest an
9816 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9817 label be? An asterisk?
9821 \begin_layout Itemize
9831 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9832 So, its label is a bullet.
9833 (We got here by using
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 arg "depth-increment"
9845 , then changing the environment to
9853 \begin_layout Itemize
9854 Here's level #4, produced using
9857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9863 arg "depth-increment"
9867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9880 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9884 , because we are in the
9892 environment (that is, it is an
9907 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9913 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 arg "depth-decrement"
9934 to decrease the depth after the next
9937 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9954 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9968 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9973 reset the counter for the label.
9977 \begin_layout Enumerate
9981 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 arg "depth-decrement"
9990 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9991 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9992 into the twofold-nested
10000 \begin_layout Enumerate
10001 The same thing happens if we do another
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 arg "depth-decrement"
10013 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10016 \begin_layout Standard
10017 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10022 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10033 The number of other
10037 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10044 The same rule applies for the
10048 environment, as well.
10051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10052 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10057 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10058 the same detail with how we did it.
10067 \begin_layout Standard
10075 arg "depth-increment"
10082 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10083 the example in parentheses someplace.
10084 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10085 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10086 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10095 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Now we will add verse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 It will get much worse.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10131 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10145 \begin_layout Verse
10146 Here comes a table:
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10157 \begin_layout Standard
10159 \begin_inset Tabular
10160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10161 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10248 \begin_layout Verse
10252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10262 arg "depth-increment"
10268 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10274 \begin_inset Newline newline
10282 arg "depth-decrement"
10289 \begin_layout Enumerate
10294 : level #1) This is another item.
10295 Note that selecting a
10299 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10300 3 times to put the table inside the
10308 \begin_layout Quotation
10309 We're now ending the
10313 list and changing to
10318 We're still at level #1.
10319 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10320 The next set of paragraphs is a
10321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10328 We will nest both the
10335 \begin_inset space ~
10340 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10344 for the letter body.
10348 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10351 to preserve the depth.
10352 Remember that you need to use
10355 arg "newline-insert newline"
10358 to create multiple lines inside the
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_layout Right Address
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10380 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10381 \begin_inset Newline newline
10387 \begin_layout Address
10389 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10400 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10401 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10402 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10403 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10404 as soon as possible.
10405 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10410 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10411 with your order, along with payment.
10414 \begin_layout Quotation
10415 We thank you again for your patience.
10418 \begin_layout Address
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10427 \begin_layout Quotation
10428 That ends that example!
10431 \begin_layout Standard
10432 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10433 gives you a lot of power with just
10435 We could have easily nested an
10456 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10459 \begin_layout Subsection
10461 \begin_inset Index idx
10464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10465 Nesting ! Separation
10471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10473 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10483 For example you need two different enumerations:
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset Separator plain
10507 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Enumerate
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10534 list item and use the menu
10536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 Start New Environment
10540 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10541 ) and behind it the new list.
10544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10545 Start New Parent Environment
10547 only appears if the item is nested.
10548 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10554 (red arrow in LyX).
10555 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10556 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10559 \begin_layout Standard
10560 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10563 arg "paragraph-break"
10570 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10573 \begin_layout Section
10574 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10575 \begin_inset Index idx
10578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10587 \begin_layout Standard
10588 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10589 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10591 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10592 be broken at the end of a line.
10593 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10597 \begin_layout Subsection
10599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10601 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10606 \begin_inset Index idx
10609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 \begin_layout Standard
10619 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10620 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10621 ) not to break the line at
10623 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10626 \begin_layout Quote
10627 Further documentation is given in section
10628 \begin_inset Newline newline
10632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10634 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10642 \begin_layout Standard
10643 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10658 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10667 A protected space is set with
10669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10670 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10672 \begin_inset space ~
10680 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10686 \begin_layout Subsection
10688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10690 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10695 \begin_inset Index idx
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10699 Spacing ! Horizontal
10707 \begin_layout Standard
10708 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10715 The length units are listed in Appendix
10716 \begin_inset space ~
10720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10722 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10733 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10738 \begin_inset Index idx
10741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10742 Spaces ! Inter-word
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10751 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10752 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10753 at the ends of sentences.
10754 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10755 automatically takes care about this.
10756 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10757 followed by a period; see section
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10764 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10769 To insert a normal space, select
10771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10782 arg "space-insert normal"
10788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10792 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10797 \begin_inset Index idx
10800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10809 \begin_layout Standard
10811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10818 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10827 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10828 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10829 inside abbreviations:
10832 \begin_layout Quote
10834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10838 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 or between values and units.
10843 Compare for example this:
10844 \begin_inset Newline newline
10848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10852 \begin_inset Newline newline
10855 10 kg (normal space
10858 \begin_layout Standard
10859 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10864 \begin_inset space ~
10872 arg "space-insert thin"
10878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10882 \begin_layout Standard
10883 You can also insert the following space types:
10886 \begin_layout Description
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10892 \begin_inset space ~
10895 space A line with a
10896 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10900 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10904 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10907 negative thin space between the arrows.
10910 \begin_layout Description
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10916 \begin_inset space ~
10919 space A line with a
10920 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10924 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10928 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10931 negative medium space between the arrows.
10934 \begin_layout Description
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10943 space A line with a
10944 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10948 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10952 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10955 negative thick space between the arrows.
10958 \begin_layout Description
10960 \begin_inset space ~
10964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10972 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10976 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10980 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10987 em) space between the arrows.
10990 \begin_layout Description
10992 \begin_inset space ~
10996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11000 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11004 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11008 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11012 \begin_inset space ~
11016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11019 em) space between the arrows.
11022 \begin_layout Description
11024 \begin_inset space ~
11028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11032 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11036 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11044 \begin_inset space ~
11048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11051 em) space between the arrows.
11054 \begin_layout Description
11056 \begin_inset space ~
11060 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11064 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 cm space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11087 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11091 lists the different space sizes.
11094 \begin_layout Standard
11095 \begin_inset Float table
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11106 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11110 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 \begin_inset Tabular
11121 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11122 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11240 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11399 \begin_inset Index idx
11402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11411 \begin_layout Standard
11412 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11413 feature for adding extra space
11414 in a uniform fashion.
11415 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11416 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11417 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11418 equally between themselves.
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11422 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11425 \begin_layout Quote
11427 This is on the left side
11428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 This is on the right
11434 \begin_layout Quote
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Quote
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11464 \begin_layout Standard
11465 That was an example in the
11471 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11475 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11479 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11482 is one in a standard paragraph.
11483 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11487 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11491 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11499 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11504 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11508 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_layout Standard
11516 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11520 \begin_inset space ~
11526 \begin_layout Standard
11528 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11532 \begin_inset space ~
11538 \begin_layout Standard
11540 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11544 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_layout Standard
11552 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11556 \begin_inset space ~
11562 \begin_layout Standard
11564 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11568 \begin_inset space ~
11574 \begin_layout Standard
11575 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11587 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11589 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11590 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11594 option in the space dialog.
11602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11606 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11611 \begin_inset Index idx
11614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11625 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11628 \begin_layout Standard
11629 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11632 What is correct English?:
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Newline newline
11641 \begin_inset space ~
11644 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11645 \begin_inset Newline newline
11649 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11660 \begin_inset Newline newline
11664 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11675 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11681 \begin_layout Standard
11683 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11700 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11707 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11724 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11733 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11734 That is why it is named
11735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11743 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11744 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11748 \begin_layout Subsection
11750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11752 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11757 \begin_inset Index idx
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 \begin_layout Standard
11770 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11775 \begin_inset space ~
11781 There you find the following sizes:
11784 \begin_layout Standard
11797 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11798 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11803 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11806 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11808 \begin_inset space ~
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 Document ! Settings
11823 for the paragraph separation.
11824 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11835 \begin_layout Standard
11841 \begin_inset Index idx
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11850 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11851 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11856 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11857 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11866 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11875 s are described in section
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11882 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11891 If there are several
11895 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11896 You can therefore use
11900 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11908 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11915 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11922 \begin_layout Standard
11923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11933 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11934 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11946 \begin_layout Subsection
11947 Paragraph Alignment
11948 \begin_inset Index idx
11951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11952 Paragraph ! Alignment
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11963 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11966 dialog (toolbar button
11969 arg "layout-paragraph"
11973 There are five possibilities:
11976 \begin_layout Itemize
11984 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11990 \begin_layout Itemize
11998 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12004 \begin_layout Itemize
12012 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12018 \begin_layout Itemize
12026 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12032 \begin_layout Itemize
12040 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12047 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12048 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12049 the left and right margins.
12050 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 This paragraph is right aligned,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is centered,
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12065 this one is left aligned.
12068 \begin_layout Subsection
12070 \begin_inset Index idx
12073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 Page breaks ! Forced
12080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12082 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12089 \begin_layout Standard
12090 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12092 force a page break where you want one.
12093 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12094 is good at page breaking.
12095 Only if you use a lot of
12099 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12104 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12105 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12109 have to change the page breaking.
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12115 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12126 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12129 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12131 \begin_inset space ~
12136 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12138 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12139 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12142 \begin_layout Standard
12143 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12144 at the top of a page.
12145 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12147 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12148 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12149 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12153 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12157 to learn more about
12164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12168 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12173 \begin_inset Index idx
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12177 Page breaks ! Clear
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12186 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12187 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12188 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12189 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12190 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12193 \begin_layout Standard
12194 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12199 \begin_inset space ~
12205 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12219 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12220 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12223 \begin_layout Subsection
12225 \begin_inset Index idx
12228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12237 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12247 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12264 arg "newline-insert newline"
12268 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12277 \begin_inset space ~
12285 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12288 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12290 This is useful to avoid
12291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12298 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12301 \begin_layout Standard
12302 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12303 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12305 very good at line breaking.
12306 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12307 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12314 reference "sec:Quote"
12319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12321 reference "sec:Verse"
12326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12328 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12335 \begin_layout Subsection
12337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12339 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12344 \begin_inset Index idx
12347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12356 \begin_layout Standard
12358 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12374 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12376 \begin_inset space ~
12381 you can insert horizontal lines.
12382 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12383 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12384 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12389 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12400 \begin_layout Section
12401 Characters and Symbols
12404 \begin_layout Standard
12405 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12406 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12407 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12415 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12419 for information on how this is done.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12428 dialog via the menu
12430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12431 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12437 \begin_layout Standard
12438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12447 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12449 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12457 \begin_layout Section
12458 Fonts and Text Styles
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12461 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12468 \begin_layout Subsection
12470 \begin_inset Index idx
12473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12482 \begin_layout Standard
12483 There are two types of fonts:
12486 \begin_layout Description
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12492 \begin_inset Index idx
12495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12501 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12506 characters) in the font.
12507 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12508 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12509 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12510 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12511 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12512 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12513 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12514 \begin_inset Newline newline
12517 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12518 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12519 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12520 sizes than at small ones.
12521 \begin_inset Newline newline
12535 \begin_inset space ~
12543 \begin_layout Description
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_inset Index idx
12552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12558 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12559 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12560 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12561 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12562 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12563 image manipulation program.
12564 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12565 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels high up to 34
12570 \begin_inset space ~
12573 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12574 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12575 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12577 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12578 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12579 \begin_inset Newline newline
12582 Bitmap fonts are named
12585 \begin_inset space ~
12590 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12593 \begin_layout Standard
12594 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12595 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12596 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12597 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12598 use scalable fonts.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12605 \begin_layout Standard
12606 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12607 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12608 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12609 font to emphasize text, you use an
12610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12618 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12620 In \SpecialChar LyX
12621 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12625 \begin_layout Subsection
12628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12630 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12637 \begin_layout Standard
12638 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 used its own fonts.
12640 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12641 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12646 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12647 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12648 to a word processor.
12649 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12650 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 files are very portable across
12652 different machines.
12653 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12654 has increased a lot
12655 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12658 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12666 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12671 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12672 code in the document
12673 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12677 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12678 engines that are also able directly
12679 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12681 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12683 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12685 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12686 that is installed on your system.
12687 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12690 \begin_layout Standard
12691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12699 In practice, some fonts might fail due to
12700 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504687062
12701 a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12704 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504687069
12707 and other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12715 \begin_layout Subsection
12716 Document Font and Font size
12717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12719 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_inset Index idx
12737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12747 You can set the document fonts in the
12749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12753 \begin_inset Index idx
12756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12757 Document ! Settings
12767 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12768 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12780 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12782 \begin_inset space ~
12785 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12788 \begin_layout Standard
12793 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12794 This requires that you use
12806 as the output format, i.
12807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12811 \begin_inset space \space{}
12814 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12815 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12816 installed (see section
12817 \begin_inset space ~
12821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12823 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12828 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12830 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12831 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12836 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12837 cannot determine the family.
12838 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12839 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12842 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12845 \begin_layout Standard
12846 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12847 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12852 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12858 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12860 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503765997
12861 With LyX's default font encoding
12862 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766002
12866 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766035
12868 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766038
12871 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 \begin_inset space ~
12885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12893 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766057
12895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12905 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766067
12909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12914 European Computer Modern
12917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12925 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766075
12927 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766073
12931 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766086
12933 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766132
12937 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766097
12940 set different default fonts.
12943 \begin_layout Standard
12945 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766148
12957 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766179
12961 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766171
12965 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766192
12969 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766205
12971 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766207
12975 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766208
12978 pixelated in PDF output, especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12984 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766226
12986 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766228
12989 if you read PDFs in
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12997 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13003 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13004 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13007 \begin_layout Itemize
13011 \begin_inset space ~
13016 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13018 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503766401
13022 \begin_inset space ~
13026 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766382
13039 \begin_inset space ~
13044 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13045 community in order to replace
13049 as the default font.
13050 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13051 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13054 \begin_inset space ~
13067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13068 One difference is improved kerning.
13074 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766263
13078 \begin_layout Itemize
13080 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503766263
13084 \begin_inset space ~
13088 \begin_inset space ~
13093 fonts in (the rare) case that
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13101 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13116 Virtual means that it
13117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13128 -glyphs from other fonts.
13129 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13151 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13157 \begin_inset Index idx
13160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13167 with the document preamble line
13168 \begin_inset Newline newline
13175 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13176 \begin_inset Newline newline
13181 will fix the guillemet problem.
13186 and that accented characters are not
13190 glyph, but built of
13194 characters, the accent and the letter.
13195 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13201 If you search for example for the French word
13202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13209 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13218 and not for the glyph
13219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13235 \begin_layout Itemize
13236 If you do not like the look of
13244 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13255 \begin_inset space ~
13265 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13266 \begin_inset space ~
13269 serif and typewriter fonts,
13273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13274 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13281 \begin_inset space ~
13290 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13295 \begin_inset space \space{}
13303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13307 \begin_inset space \space{}
13313 \begin_inset space ~
13321 \begin_inset space ~
13331 but you can also select your own.
13332 \begin_inset Newline newline
13335 The differences between roman,
13338 \begin_inset space ~
13347 fonts are explained in section
13348 \begin_inset space ~
13352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13354 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13359 \begin_inset Newline newline
13365 \begin_inset space ~
13370 was originally designed for newspapers.
13371 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13372 into the small newspaper columns.
13376 \begin_inset space ~
13381 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13384 \begin_layout Standard
13385 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13398 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13403 depends on the class you are using.
13404 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13407 \begin_layout Standard
13408 Note that the font size is the
13413 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13414 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13415 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13416 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13419 \begin_inset space ~
13425 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13426 \begin_inset space ~
13430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13432 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13439 \begin_layout Standard
13443 \begin_inset space ~
13448 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13453 serif or typewriter.
13458 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13468 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13471 \begin_layout Standard
13476 LaTeX font encoding
13478 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13479 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13485 \begin_inset Index idx
13488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13496 \begin_inset space ~
13500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13502 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13507 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13508 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13515 \begin_layout Standard
13516 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13518 Use Old Style Figures
13522 Use True Small Caps
13525 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13528 Use Old Style Figures
13530 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13532 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13540 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13544 Use True Small Caps
13546 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13547 of scaled capitals.
13548 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13549 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13552 \begin_layout Standard
13557 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13558 a font to display the script characters.
13562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13563 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13569 \begin_inset Index idx
13572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13579 So this has no effect for the document language
13593 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13597 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13605 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13610 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13611 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13613 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13615 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13618 dialog, see section
13619 \begin_inset space ~
13623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13625 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13637 \begin_layout Subsection
13641 \begin_layout Standard
13642 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13643 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13645 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13646 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13647 choose a math font in the dialog
13649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13653 \begin_inset Index idx
13656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13657 Document ! Settings
13663 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13664 automatically selects a math font.
13665 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13666 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13675 \begin_inset space ~
13681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13686 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13687 document font is available.
13690 \begin_layout Standard
13691 Note that the math font will not be used for
13695 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13701 or by the insertion of the command
13708 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13709 \begin_inset space ~
13713 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13714 while the math characters do not.
13716 \begin_inset space ~
13719 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13722 \begin_inset space ~
13730 \begin_inset space ~
13735 in the document font settings.
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13740 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13741 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13742 font (in most cases
13743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13749 \begin_inset space ~
13755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13758 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13759 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13767 \begin_inset space ~
13773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13779 \begin_layout Subsection
13780 Using Different Character Styles
13781 \begin_inset Index idx
13784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13791 \begin_inset Index idx
13794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13803 \begin_layout Standard
13804 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13805 automatically changes the character style for certain
13806 paragraph environments.
13808 supports two character styles,
13817 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13826 style, do one of the following:
13829 \begin_layout Itemize
13830 click on the toolbar button
13839 \begin_layout Itemize
13840 use the key binding
13849 \begin_layout Standard
13850 These commands are all toggles.
13855 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13858 \begin_layout Standard
13859 One typically uses the
13863 style for proper names.
13865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13872 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13880 \begin_layout Standard
13881 A more widely used character style is the
13886 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13893 \begin_layout Itemize
13894 clicking on the toolbar button
13903 \begin_layout Itemize
13904 using the keybindings
13913 \begin_layout Standard
13918 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13920 use a different font.
13923 \begin_layout Standard
13924 We've been using the
13928 style all over the place in this document.
13929 Here's one more example:
13932 \begin_layout Quotation
13935 Do not overuse character styles!
13938 \begin_layout Standard
13939 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13940 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13941 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13942 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13946 \begin_layout Standard
13947 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13955 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13957 \begin_inset space ~
13960 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13966 arg "dialog-show character"
13972 \begin_layout Subsection
13973 Fine-Tuning with the
13978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13980 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13985 \begin_inset Index idx
13988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13997 \begin_layout Standard
13998 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
14000 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
14001 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14002 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14003 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14004 from ordinary dialog.
14007 \begin_layout Standard
14008 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
14009 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
14010 \begin_inset Newline newline
14013 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14014 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14017 \begin_layout Standard
14018 To use custom character styles, open the
14020 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14022 \begin_inset space ~
14025 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14028 dialog or press the toolbar button
14031 arg "dialog-show character"
14035 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14036 font property that you can choose.
14037 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14040 \begin_inset space ~
14045 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14050 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14051 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14052 environments all at once.
14055 \begin_layout Standard
14056 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
14059 \begin_inset space ~
14071 \begin_layout Labeling
14072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14086 The possible options are:
14090 \begin_layout Labeling
14091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14096 This is the Roman font family.
14097 Normally a serif font.
14098 It's also the default family.
14108 \begin_layout Labeling
14109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14113 \begin_inset space ~
14120 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14132 \begin_layout Labeling
14133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14140 This is the Typewriter font family.
14146 arg "font-typewriter"
14155 \begin_layout Labeling
14156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14161 This corresponds to the print weight.
14166 \begin_layout Labeling
14167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14172 This is the Medium font series.
14173 It's also the default series.
14176 \begin_layout Labeling
14177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14184 This is the Bold font series.
14197 \begin_layout Labeling
14198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14203 As the name implies.
14208 \begin_layout Labeling
14209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14214 This is the Upright font shape.
14215 It's also the default shape.
14218 \begin_layout Labeling
14219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14233 s the Italic font shape
14239 \begin_layout Labeling
14240 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14247 This is the Slanted font shape
14249 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14250 , this is different from italic).
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14258 \begin_inset space ~
14265 This is the Small caps font shape
14272 \begin_layout Labeling
14273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14278 Alters the text color.
14279 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14283 \begin_inset space ~
14288 , which means that the document default color set in
14290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14291 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14297 \begin_inset space ~
14302 is used, you can choose between
14379 \begin_inset Index idx
14382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14391 \begin_layout Labeling
14392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14397 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14398 the language of the document.
14399 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14400 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14402 \begin_inset Newline newline
14405 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14407 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14408 When using the spell checking (see section
14409 \begin_inset space ~
14413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14415 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14419 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14422 \begin_layout Labeling
14423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14428 Alters the size of the font.
14429 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14430 proportional to the document font size.
14431 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14432 the details, but a general description of what
14438 \begin_layout Labeling
14439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14460 arg "font-size tiny"
14466 \begin_layout Labeling
14467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14488 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14494 \begin_layout Labeling
14495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14516 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14522 \begin_layout Labeling
14523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14544 arg "font-size small"
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14565 It's also the default size.
14569 arg "font-size normal"
14575 \begin_layout Labeling
14576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14597 arg "font-size large"
14603 \begin_layout Labeling
14604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14625 arg "font-size larger"
14631 \begin_layout Labeling
14632 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 arg "font-size largest"
14659 \begin_layout Labeling
14660 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14681 arg "font-size huge"
14687 \begin_layout Labeling
14688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14709 arg "font-size giant"
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14721 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14741 arg "font-size increase"
14747 \begin_layout Labeling
14748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14753 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14773 arg "font-size decrease"
14780 \begin_layout Standard
14785 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14786 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14788 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14789 — use those instead.
14790 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14793 \begin_layout Labeling
14794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14799 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14804 \begin_layout Labeling
14805 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14812 This is text with emphasize on
14815 This might seem like the same as
14819 , but it is actually a bit different.
14825 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14827 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14830 \begin_layout Labeling
14831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14838 This is text with Underbar on.
14844 arg "font-underline"
14850 \begin_inset Newline newline
14855 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14856 when you could not change fonts.
14857 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14858 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14859 because some people
14863 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14866 \begin_layout Labeling
14867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14878 This is text with Double underbar on.
14884 arg "font-underunderline"
14888 \begin_inset Newline newline
14891 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14892 about double underbar.
14895 \begin_layout Labeling
14896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14900 \begin_inset space ~
14907 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14913 arg "font-underwave"
14917 \begin_inset Newline newline
14920 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14921 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14924 \begin_layout Labeling
14925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14932 This is text with Strikeout on.
14938 arg "font-strikeout"
14942 \begin_inset Newline newline
14945 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14946 changed in the meantime.
14949 \begin_layout Labeling
14950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14957 This is text with Noun on.
14964 , this is a logical attribute.
14965 Normally it's equivalent to
14968 \begin_inset space ~
14977 \begin_layout Standard
14978 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14979 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14981 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14983 \begin_inset space ~
14986 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14992 arg "dialog-show character"
14995 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14996 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14999 arg "textstyle-apply"
15003 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
15007 \begin_layout Standard
15008 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
15015 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
15016 (suppose you just set the shape to
15017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15035 \begin_inset space ~
15047 \begin_layout Standard
15048 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
15056 \begin_inset space ~
15068 \begin_layout Itemize
15074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15081 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15099 \begin_inset Newline newline
15103 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15117 \begin_inset Note Note
15120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15121 For more on phantoms see section
15122 \begin_inset space ~
15126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15128 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15138 \begin_inset Newline newline
15144 \begin_layout Itemize
15149 fonts use characters with serifs.
15150 These are the small
15151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15158 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15159 The following example shows the difference:
15160 \begin_inset Newline newline
15164 \begin_inset Newline newline
15169 text without serifs
15172 \begin_inset Newline newline
15175 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15176 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15183 \begin_layout Itemize
15188 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15189 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15190 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15193 \begin_layout Standard
15194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15201 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15202 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15205 \begin_inset space ~
15210 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15211 the property to be removed.
15212 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15213 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15214 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15232 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15233 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15241 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15245 \begin_inset space ~
15250 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15261 If you, for example, set
15262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15280 \begin_inset space ~
15285 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15294 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15297 \begin_layout Standard
15298 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15299 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15302 \begin_layout Section
15303 Printing and Previewing
15306 \begin_layout Subsection
15310 \begin_layout Standard
15311 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15312 using \SpecialChar LyX
15313 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15314 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15315 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15316 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15318 Additional Features
15323 \begin_layout Standard
15325 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15328 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15329 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15330 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15333 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15334 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15335 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15336 to turn your writing into printable output.
15337 This happens in two stages:
15340 \begin_layout Enumerate
15341 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15342 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15344 a file with the extension,
15345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15359 \begin_layout Enumerate
15360 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15361 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15362 to use the commands in the
15366 file to produce printable output.
15369 \begin_layout Subsection
15370 Output file formats
15371 \begin_inset Index idx
15374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15383 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15391 Simple text (ASCII)
15392 \begin_inset Index idx
15395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15396 File formats ! ASCII
15404 \begin_layout Standard
15405 This file type has the extension
15406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15418 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15422 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15429 \begin_layout Standard
15430 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15432 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15433 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15435 \begin_inset space ~
15441 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15442 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15443 bibliography (section
15444 \begin_inset space ~
15448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15450 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15455 If your document includes such material, use
15457 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15458 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15460 \begin_inset space ~
15464 \begin_inset space ~
15468 \begin_inset space ~
15476 \begin_inset space ~
15480 \begin_inset space ~
15486 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15487 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15493 \begin_inset Index idx
15496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15497 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15506 \begin_layout Standard
15507 This file type has the extension
15508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15519 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15522 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15523 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15524 -Errors or to process it manually
15525 with console commands.
15526 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15527 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15528 's temporary directory whenever you
15529 view or export your document.
15532 \begin_layout Standard
15533 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15534 -file using the menu
15536 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15537 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15541 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15542 export variants are explained in section
15543 \begin_inset space ~
15547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15549 reference "subsec:Export"
15556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15558 \begin_inset Index idx
15561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15570 \begin_layout Standard
15571 This file type has the extension
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15592 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15593 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15594 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15598 \begin_layout Standard
15599 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15600 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15601 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15602 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15603 when you view the DVI.
15604 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15607 \begin_layout Standard
15608 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15610 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15611 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15616 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15617 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15619 \begin_inset space ~
15625 The latter option uses the program
15627 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15633 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15636 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15637 font access (see section
15638 \begin_inset space ~
15642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15644 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15649 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15650 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15657 \begin_inset Index idx
15660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15661 File formats ! PostScript
15669 \begin_layout Standard
15670 This file type has the extension
15671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15683 PostScript was developed by the company
15687 as a printer language.
15688 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15690 PostScript can be seen as a
15691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15694 programming language
15695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15698 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15703 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15710 \begin_inset Index idx
15713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15715 packages ! pstricks
15725 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 Encapsulated PostScript
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 (EPS, file extension
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 As \SpecialChar LyX
15751 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15752 convert them in the background to EPS.
15753 If, for example, you have 50
15754 \begin_inset space ~
15757 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15759 \begin_inset space ~
15762 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15763 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15765 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15766 EPS to avoid this problem.
15769 \begin_layout Standard
15770 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15772 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15773 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15781 \begin_inset Index idx
15784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15791 \begin_inset Index idx
15794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15804 This file type has the extension
15805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15821 Portable Document Format
15822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15829 was derived from PostScript.
15830 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15839 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15840 looks exactly the same.
15843 \begin_layout Standard
15844 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15848 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15852 (JPG, file extension
15853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15880 Portable Network Graphics
15881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15884 (PNG, file extension
15885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15897 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15898 converts them in the
15899 background to one of these formats.
15900 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15901 will slow down your workflow.
15902 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15905 \begin_layout Standard
15906 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15908 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15914 \begin_layout Description
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15919 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15923 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15926 \begin_layout Description
15928 \begin_inset space ~
15935 ) This uses the program
15937 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15940 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15943 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15946 is a new engine, derived from
15950 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15951 access (see section
15952 \begin_inset space ~
15956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15958 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15963 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15964 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15969 \begin_layout Description
15971 \begin_inset space ~
15978 ) This uses the program
15983 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15989 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15990 font access (see section
15991 \begin_inset space ~
15995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15997 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16002 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16003 vertically written Japanese.
16006 \begin_layout Description
16008 \begin_inset space ~
16011 (cropped) This is the same as
16014 \begin_inset space ~
16019 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16020 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16021 to generate good-looking
16022 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16025 \begin_layout Description
16027 \begin_inset space ~
16030 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16034 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16038 \begin_layout Description
16040 \begin_inset space ~
16043 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16047 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16048 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16052 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16053 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16056 \begin_layout Standard
16060 \begin_inset space ~
16069 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16070 works without problems.
16071 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16072 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16076 \begin_inset space ~
16084 \begin_inset space ~
16089 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16099 \begin_inset Index idx
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16103 FileFormats ! XHTML
16109 \begin_inset Index idx
16112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16121 \begin_layout Standard
16122 This file type has the extension
16123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16135 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16136 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16137 When \SpecialChar LyX
16138 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16139 suitable for the purpose.
16140 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16142 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16143 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16146 between different formats, which are described in section
16148 Math Output in XHTML
16153 \begin_inset space ~
16161 \begin_layout Standard
16162 XHTML output remains
16163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16170 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16171 features are supported yet.
16175 and the World Wide Web
16179 Additional Features
16181 manual, for more information.
16184 \begin_layout Standard
16185 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16187 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16188 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16194 \begin_layout Subsection
16196 \begin_inset Index idx
16199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16208 \begin_layout Standard
16209 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16210 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16219 or use the toolbar button
16226 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16227 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16228 \begin_inset space ~
16232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16234 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16238 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16240 \begin_inset space ~
16244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16246 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16251 Further output formats can be selected via
16253 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16254 View (Other Formats)
16256 or the toolbar button
16265 \begin_layout Standard
16266 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16267 viewer window using the menu
16269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16274 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16275 Update (Other Formats)
16280 \begin_layout Standard
16281 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16284 To have a real output, export your document.
16287 \begin_layout Section
16288 A few Words about Typography
16289 \begin_inset Index idx
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 \begin_layout Subsection
16302 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16303 \begin_inset Index idx
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16313 \begin_inset Index idx
16316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 \begin_layout Standard
16326 In \SpecialChar LyX
16328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16339 character comes in four
16340 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705237
16342 \change_deleted -1402925745 1504687253
16362 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16368 \begin_layout Standard
16370 \change_deleted -1402925745 1504705830
16371 \begin_inset Tabular
16372 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16373 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16374 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16375 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16376 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16377 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16406 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16407 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16446 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16470 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504246984
16471 system-wide key combination or
16472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16482 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503767710
16483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16485 \begin_inset space ~
16488 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16497 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16521 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504246993
16522 system-wide key combination or
16523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16533 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503767719
16534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16536 \begin_inset space ~
16539 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16549 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16562 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16596 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16598 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16608 height_special "totalheight"
16613 backgroundcolor "none"
16616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16618 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16619 \begin_inset Tabular
16620 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16621 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16622 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16623 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16624 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16625 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16626 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16631 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16653 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16660 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16666 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16677 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16688 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16706 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16707 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16712 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16723 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16734 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504707530
16735 system key combination
16739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16741 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504706094
16742 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16746 and the em dash with
16748 Shift-Option-hyphen
16754 is the Mac label for the right
16763 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16767 \begin_inset space ~
16770 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16782 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16783 and 2014 for the en dash).
16784 The function can also be bound to a key combination in Tools
16786 \SpecialChar menuseparator
16791 \SpecialChar menuseparator
16796 \SpecialChar menuseparator
16807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16824 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16830 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16841 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16852 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504707540
16853 system key combination or
16854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16870 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16875 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16886 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16887 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16900 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504705830
16901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16932 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16938 \begin_layout Standard
16940 \change_deleted -1402925745 1503767103
16941 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16953 character multiple times in a row.
16954 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16955 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16990 \begin_layout Standard
16992 \change_deleted -1402925745 1504539178
16994 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504539175
16996 \change_deleted -1402925745 1504539069
16999 are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math mode and has a
17001 Here are some examples:
17004 \begin_layout Enumerate
17005 line- and page-breaks
17006 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17016 \begin_layout Enumerate
17018 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503767510
17022 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17030 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504682326
17034 \begin_layout Enumerate
17036 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504708446
17037 Dashes indicate interruptions, performing a function related to – but subtly
17038 different from – parentheses.
17039 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17052 \begin_layout Standard
17054 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504708469
17055 The em dash is used without spaces:
17058 \change_deleted -1402925745 1504708486
17062 \change_deleted -1402925745 1504708486
17066 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17074 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504679045
17079 \begin_layout Enumerate
17080 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17084 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17092 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503937275
17096 \begin_layout Standard
17098 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710179
17100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17102 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17103 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17111 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17113 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938327
17114 Dashes and line breaks
17115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17117 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17124 \begin_layout Standard
17126 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686237
17127 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17131 \begin_layout Itemize
17133 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504302249
17134 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
17139 \begin_layout Itemize
17141 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504537660
17142 In English, lines may break after dashes used to set off parenthetical statement
17146 \begin_layout Itemize
17148 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504678633
17149 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17150 similar to quote signs and line breaks are not allowed on the
17151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17161 \begin_layout Standard
17163 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711768
17164 When using spaced en dashes
17165 \begin_inset space ~
17168 - common in British English
17169 \begin_inset space ~
17172 - prevent line breaks before the dash with protected spaces.
17175 \begin_layout Standard
17177 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686608
17178 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17179 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17184 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17185 Optional line break
17190 \begin_layout Standard
17192 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504708653
17193 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select
17195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17197 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17198 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
17201 This forces output of dashes as
17202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17217 when exporting to LaTeX.
17218 The TeX font ligature mechanism convertes them to dash characters followed
17219 by an optional line break.
17222 \begin_layout Standard
17224 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504003320
17230 \begin_layout Enumerate
17232 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686268
17233 This results in optional line breaks after
17238 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox or preceding
17249 \begin_layout Quote
17251 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504539888
17253 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17263 height_special "totalheight"
17268 backgroundcolor "none"
17271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17273 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504013627
17283 \begin_layout Standard
17285 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504539962
17287 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17297 height_special "totalheight"
17302 backgroundcolor "none"
17305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17307 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504539973
17309 \begin_inset space ~
17317 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17318 \begin_inset space ~
17321 – sont très utiles.
17325 \begin_layout Quote
17327 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686902
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17334 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504246896
17345 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17348 \begin_layout Standard
17350 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504708818
17351 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17352 \begin_inset space ~
17355 – in contrast to an overfull line
17356 \begin_inset space ~
17359 – it does not trigger a warning in the LaTeX log.
17363 \begin_layout Enumerate
17365 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504012609
17366 The setting is ignored for documents using non-TeX fonts.
17370 \begin_layout Standard
17372 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709863
17377 XeTeXdashbreakstate
17381 \begin_inset Newline newline
17388 XeTeXdashbreakstate=1
17390 , causes literal dashes to behave like
17391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17404 \begin_layout Enumerate
17406 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686210
17424 \begin_layout Enumerate
17426 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504003612
17427 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and
17428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17438 \begin_layout Standard
17440 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709020
17444 \begin_layout Labeling
17445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17447 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711065
17449 \begin_inset space ~
17452 2.2 -- and --- in the LyX source are output as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent
17453 ligation to dashes.
17457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17459 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711038
17461 \begin_inset space ~
17464 2.1, -- and --- in the LyX source was output
17465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17472 which led to different look in the GUI, text, or HTML vs.
17473 documents compiled with LaTeX.
17481 Occurences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes [
17482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17484 name "changeset 8aa37c43"
17485 target "http://www.lyx.org/trac/changeset/8aa37c43/lyxgit"
17494 \begin_layout Itemize
17496 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709468
17497 In some cases this leads to different line breaks.
17501 \begin_layout Itemize
17503 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710005
17504 It is no longer possible to differentiate dashes with/without optional line
17505 break using --- and -- vs.
17507 Either convert one sort to ERT or insert optional line break characters.
17513 \begin_layout Labeling
17514 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17516 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710385
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17525 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17526 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
17529 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with LyX 2.2.
17534 \begin_layout Itemize
17536 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
17537 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-2.2 documents, you must manually
17538 unselect it to ensure unchanged behaviour.
17541 \begin_layout Itemize
17543 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
17544 ZWSP characters (u200b) following literal em- and en-dashes are deleted
17545 by lyx2lyx when converting to 2.3 format.
17546 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
17547 space insets before opening your document with LyX 2.3 or the optional line
17548 breaks will be lost!
17551 \begin_layout Itemize
17553 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709574
17554 As with all settings, the default for new documents can be configured via
17559 \begin_layout Subsection
17561 \begin_inset Index idx
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17573 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17580 \begin_layout Standard
17581 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17582 but automatically in the output.
17583 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17589 \begin_inset Index idx
17592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17599 following the rules of the document language.
17602 \begin_layout Standard
17604 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17608 font and with unusual constructs, like
17609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17617 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17618 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17619 This is done with the menu
17621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17622 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17630 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17632 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17636 \begin_layout Standard
17637 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17638 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17649 would then see the hyphen
17650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17657 as a hyphenation possibility.
17658 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17659 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can
17660 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504001674
17661 use a protected hyphen (
17663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17669 put it into a makebox as described in section
17671 Prevent Hyphenation
17676 \begin_inset space ~
17684 \begin_layout Subsection
17686 \begin_inset Index idx
17689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17699 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17702 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17709 \begin_layout Standard
17710 When \SpecialChar LyX
17711 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17712 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17714 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17720 appropriate amount of space.
17721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17724 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17726 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17727 gets after another word.
17730 \begin_layout Standard
17731 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17732 not work in all cases.
17734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17745 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17746 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17749 \begin_layout Standard
17750 Here are some examples of
17754 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17757 \begin_layout Itemize
17762 \begin_layout Itemize
17767 \begin_layout Standard
17768 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17771 \begin_layout Itemize
17773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17777 this is too much space!
17780 \begin_layout Itemize
17785 \begin_layout Standard
17786 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17789 \begin_layout Standard
17790 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17793 \begin_layout Enumerate
17797 \begin_inset space ~
17802 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17803 \begin_inset space ~
17807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17809 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17814 \begin_inset Index idx
17817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17818 Spaces ! inter-word
17826 \begin_layout Enumerate
17830 \begin_inset space ~
17835 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17836 \begin_inset space ~
17840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17842 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17847 \begin_inset Index idx
17850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17859 \begin_layout Enumerate
17863 \begin_inset space ~
17867 \begin_inset space ~
17871 \begin_inset space ~
17878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17880 \begin_inset space ~
17885 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17886 This function is also bound to
17889 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17895 \begin_layout Standard
17896 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17899 \begin_layout Itemize
17901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17905 \begin_inset space \space{}
17908 this is too much space!
17911 \begin_layout Itemize
17912 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17916 \begin_layout Standard
17917 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17918 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17920 will take care of this.
17923 \begin_layout Standard
17924 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17928 \begin_inset space ~
17934 feature described in the section
17936 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17941 Additional Features
17946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17948 \begin_inset Index idx
17951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 Typography ! Quotation marks
17958 \begin_inset Index idx
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 Quotation marks | see
17966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17992 \begin_layout Standard
17994 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17995 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17996 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18006 The keyboard character,
18010 , generates this automatically.
18013 \begin_layout Standard
18014 You can specify what character the
18018 key produces by using the submenu
18024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18028 \begin_inset Index idx
18031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18032 Document ! Settings
18037 dialog and switching the
18041 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18042 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18044 \begin_inset space ~
18050 \begin_layout Labeling
18051 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18067 \begin_inset space ~
18071 \begin_inset Quotes els
18075 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18089 \begin_inset Quotes els
18093 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18096 quotation marks (as common, e.
18097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18103 \begin_layout Labeling
18104 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18107 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18111 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18115 \begin_inset space ~
18119 \begin_inset space ~
18123 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18127 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18133 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18137 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18141 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18145 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18148 quotation marks (as common, e.
18149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18155 \begin_layout Labeling
18156 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18159 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18163 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18167 \begin_inset space ~
18171 \begin_inset space ~
18175 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18179 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18185 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18189 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18193 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18197 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18200 quotation marks (as common, e.
18201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18207 \begin_layout Labeling
18208 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18211 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18215 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18227 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18231 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18237 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18241 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18245 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18249 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18252 quotation marks (as common, e.
18253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18259 \begin_layout Labeling
18260 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18263 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18267 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18275 \begin_inset space ~
18279 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18283 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18289 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18293 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18297 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18301 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18304 quotation marks (as common, e.
18305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18308 g., in Switzerland)
18311 \begin_layout Labeling
18312 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18315 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18319 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18323 \begin_inset space ~
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18331 \begin_inset Quotes als
18335 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18341 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18345 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18349 \begin_inset Quotes als
18353 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18356 quotation marks (as common, e.
18357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18363 \begin_layout Labeling
18364 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18367 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18371 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18375 \begin_inset space ~
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18383 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18387 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18393 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18397 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18401 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18405 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18408 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18411 \begin_layout Labeling
18412 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18415 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18419 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18423 \begin_inset space ~
18427 \begin_inset space ~
18431 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18435 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18441 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18445 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18449 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18453 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18456 quotation marks (as common, e.
18457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18460 g., in Great Britain)
18463 \begin_layout Labeling
18464 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18467 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18471 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18475 \begin_inset space ~
18479 \begin_inset space ~
18483 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18487 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18493 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18497 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18501 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18505 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18508 quotation marks (as common, e.
18509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18515 \begin_layout Labeling
18516 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18519 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18523 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18527 \begin_inset space ~
18531 \begin_inset space ~
18535 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18539 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18545 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18549 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18553 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18557 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18560 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18566 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18567 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18568 the inner marks differ).
18576 \begin_layout Labeling
18577 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18580 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18584 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18588 \begin_inset space ~
18592 \begin_inset space ~
18596 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18600 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18606 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18610 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18614 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18618 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18621 quotation marks (as common, e.
18622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18628 \begin_layout Labeling
18629 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18632 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18636 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18640 \begin_inset space ~
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18648 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18652 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18658 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18662 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18666 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18670 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18673 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18676 \begin_layout Labeling
18677 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18678 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18686 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18692 \begin_inset space ~
18696 \begin_inset space ~
18702 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18710 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18714 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18718 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18722 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18726 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18729 quotation marks (as common, e.
18730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18738 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18739 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18747 \begin_layout Labeling
18748 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18749 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18757 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18763 \begin_inset space ~
18767 \begin_inset space ~
18773 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18781 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18785 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18789 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18793 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18797 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18800 quotation marks (as common, e.
18801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18804 g., in North Korea and China)
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18810 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18818 \begin_layout Standard
18819 Inner quotation marks
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18824 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18825 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18826 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18834 does not necessarily mean
18835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18843 This is why we call them
18844 \begin_inset Quotes els
18848 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18864 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18866 \begin_inset Quotes els
18870 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18873 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18876 arg "quote-insert inner"
18881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18887 \begin_layout Standard
18888 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18889 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18890 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18891 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18892 If you check the setting
18894 Use dynamic quotation marks
18898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18899 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18902 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18903 they appear in a special color).
18904 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18905 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18910 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18913 \begin_layout Standard
18914 Individual quotation marks (i.
18915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18918 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18919 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18923 \begin_layout Subsection
18925 \begin_inset Index idx
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18929 Typography ! Ligatures
18935 \begin_inset Index idx
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18969 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18976 \begin_layout Standard
18977 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18978 print them as single characters.
18979 These groups are known as
18984 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18985 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18987 Here are the standard ligatures:
18990 \begin_layout Itemize
18994 \begin_layout Itemize
18998 \begin_layout Itemize
19002 \begin_layout Itemize
19006 \begin_layout Itemize
19010 \begin_layout Standard
19011 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19014 \begin_layout Standard
19015 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19016 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19024 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19040 To break a ligature, use
19042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19043 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19045 \begin_inset space ~
19052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19063 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19080 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19088 \begin_layout Subsection
19090 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19092 \begin_inset Index idx
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19105 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19116 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19120 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19123 \begin_layout Description
19125 The name of the game.
19128 \begin_layout Description
19130 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19134 \begin_layout Description
19136 The \SpecialChar TeX
19137 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19141 \begin_layout Description
19142 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19143 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19147 \begin_layout Standard
19148 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19154 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19162 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19163 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19164 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19165 converges to the number
19166 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19169 : The actual version is
19170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19178 , the previous one was
19179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19190 \begin_layout Subsection
19192 \begin_inset Index idx
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 \begin_layout Standard
19205 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19206 space between two words.
19207 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19217 for units use the menu
19219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19220 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19222 \begin_inset space ~
19230 arg "space-insert thin"
19236 \begin_layout Standard
19237 Here is an example to show the differences:
19240 \begin_layout Standard
19241 \begin_inset Tabular
19242 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19243 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19244 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19252 \begin_inset space ~
19256 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19268 space between number and unit
19275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19284 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19296 half space between number and unit
19309 \begin_layout Subsection
19311 \begin_inset Index idx
19314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19323 \begin_layout Standard
19324 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19326 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19327 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19328 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19329 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19330 These bits of text became known as
19341 \begin_layout Standard
19342 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19343 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19344 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19345 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19346 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19347 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19348 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19349 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19350 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19351 \begin_inset Newline newline
19359 \begin_inset Newline newline
19367 \begin_inset Newline newline
19370 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19371 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19372 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19374 \begin_inset space ~
19378 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19380 key "latexcompanion"
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19397 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19398 's page break mechanism.
19401 \begin_layout Chapter
19402 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19405 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19412 \begin_layout Standard
19413 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19416 \begin_inset space ~
19422 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19425 \begin_layout Section
19427 \begin_inset Index idx
19430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19446 \begin_layout Standard
19448 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19451 \begin_layout Description
19454 \begin_inset space ~
19457 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19458 \begin_inset Newline newline
19462 \begin_inset Note Note
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19466 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19474 \begin_layout Description
19475 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19476 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19477 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19480 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19481 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19483 \begin_inset space ~
19489 \begin_inset Newline newline
19493 \begin_inset Note Comment
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19506 \begin_layout Description
19508 \begin_inset space ~
19511 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19512 set in the document settings under
19514 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19516 \begin_inset space ~
19522 \begin_inset Newline newline
19526 \begin_inset Newline newline
19530 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19539 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19540 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19545 of a comment that appears in the output.
19551 \begin_inset Newline newline
19555 \begin_inset Newline newline
19558 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19561 \begin_layout Standard
19562 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19574 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19577 \begin_layout Section
19579 \begin_inset Index idx
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19591 name "sec:Footnotes"
19598 \begin_layout Standard
19600 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19606 or the toolbar button
19609 arg "footnote-insert"
19621 \begin_inset Graphics
19622 filename clipart/footnote.png
19631 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19632 's representation of your footnote.
19642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19661 label, the box will
19665 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19666 Clicking on the box label again will close
19679 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19680 and click on the footnote
19695 \begin_layout Standard
19696 Here is an example footnote:
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19713 \begin_layout Standard
19714 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19715 position where the footnote box is placed.
19716 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19717 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19718 according to the document class.
19720 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19721 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19727 ey are described in the
19730 \begin_inset space ~
19738 \begin_layout Section
19740 \begin_inset Index idx
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19752 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19759 \begin_layout Standard
19760 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19762 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19766 \begin_inset space ~
19771 or the toolbar button
19774 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19800 appearing within your text.
19801 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19802 's representation of your margin
19811 \begin_layout Standard
19812 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19816 \begin_inset Marginal
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 This is a marginal note.
19829 \begin_layout Standard
19830 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19831 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19832 pages, right on odd pages.
19835 \begin_layout Standard
19836 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19839 \begin_inset space ~
19847 \begin_inset space ~
19855 \begin_layout Section
19856 Graphics and Images
19857 \begin_inset Index idx
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 \begin_inset Index idx
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19879 name "sec:Graphics"
19886 \begin_layout Standard
19887 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19888 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19891 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19900 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19903 \begin_layout Standard
19904 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19909 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19910 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19912 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19913 \begin_inset space ~
19917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19919 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19926 \begin_layout Standard
19931 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19932 of the image in the output.
19933 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19937 \begin_inset space ~
19941 \begin_inset space ~
19950 \begin_inset space ~
19954 \begin_inset space ~
19958 \begin_inset space ~
19963 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19964 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19972 \begin_layout Standard
19976 \begin_inset space ~
19980 \begin_inset space ~
19985 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19986 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19988 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19993 \begin_inset space ~
19998 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19999 with the image size is printed.
20002 \begin_layout Standard
20003 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20004 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20006 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20009 \begin_layout Standard
20011 \begin_inset Graphics
20012 filename clipart/mobius.eps
20020 \begin_layout Standard
20021 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20022 the image into a float, see section
20023 \begin_inset space ~
20027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20029 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20036 \begin_layout Subsection
20038 \begin_inset Index idx
20041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20050 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20057 \begin_layout Standard
20058 You can insert images in any known file format.
20059 But as we explained in section
20060 \begin_inset space ~
20064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20066 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20070 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20072 therefore uses the program
20076 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20077 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20078 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20079 \begin_inset space ~
20083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20085 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20092 \begin_layout Standard
20093 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20096 \begin_layout Description
20098 \begin_inset space ~
20101 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20102 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20103 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20107 Graphics Interchange Format
20108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20111 (GIF, file extension
20112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20124 \begin_inset Index idx
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20159 Portable Network Graphics
20160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20163 (PNG, file extension
20164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20176 \begin_inset Index idx
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20211 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20215 (JPG, file extension
20216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20240 \begin_inset Index idx
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 \begin_layout Description
20276 \begin_inset space ~
20279 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20281 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20282 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20283 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20284 \begin_inset Newline newline
20287 Scalable image formats can be
20288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20291 Scalable Vector Graphics
20292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20295 (SVG, file extension
20296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20308 \begin_inset Index idx
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20343 Encapsulated PostScript
20344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20347 (EPS, file extension
20348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20360 \begin_inset Index idx
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20395 Portable Document Format
20396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20399 (PDF, file extension
20400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20412 \begin_inset Index idx
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20430 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20431 result will not be scalable.
20432 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20446 \begin_layout Standard
20447 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20454 \begin_layout Subsection
20455 Grouping of Image Settings
20456 \begin_inset Index idx
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 Images ! Settings grouping
20468 \begin_layout Standard
20469 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20471 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20472 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20474 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20475 need to manually change each of them.
20479 \begin_layout Standard
20480 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20483 \begin_inset space ~
20487 \begin_inset space ~
20499 \begin_inset space ~
20503 \begin_inset space ~
20509 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20510 and checking the name of the desired group.
20513 \begin_layout Section
20515 \begin_inset Index idx
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20534 \begin_layout Standard
20535 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20538 arg "tabular-insert"
20543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20547 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20548 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20549 from the rest of the table.
20550 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20551 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20553 Here is an example table:
20556 \begin_layout Standard
20558 \begin_inset Tabular
20559 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20560 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 \begin_layout Subsection
20768 \begin_layout Standard
20769 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20772 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20776 This brings up the table dialog.
20777 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20778 cursor is placed currently.
20779 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20780 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20781 done on all of your selection.
20784 \begin_layout Standard
20785 In addition to the table dialog, the
20788 \begin_inset space ~
20793 helps you in setting table properties.
20794 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20797 \begin_layout Standard
20801 \begin_inset space ~
20806 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20807 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20808 current cell respectively.
20809 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20811 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20812 of text, see section
20813 \begin_inset space ~
20817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20819 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20826 \begin_layout Standard
20827 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20828 using the check box
20837 This will merge the cells to
20841 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20842 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20843 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20844 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20845 in the last row without the upper border:
20848 \begin_layout Standard
20850 \begin_inset Tabular
20851 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20852 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20853 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20854 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 \begin_layout Standard
20988 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20989 -arguments for the table.
20990 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20991 explained in the chapter
20998 \begin_inset space ~
21004 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21005 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21006 but are visible in the output.
21009 \begin_layout Standard
21010 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 Most DVI-viewers are
21022 able to display rotations.
21030 \begin_layout Standard
21035 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21040 adds lines for all cell borders.
21043 \begin_layout Subsection
21045 \begin_inset Index idx
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 Tables ! Multi-page
21055 \begin_inset Index idx
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 \begin_layout Standard
21068 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21071 \begin_inset space ~
21075 \begin_inset space ~
21083 \begin_inset space ~
21088 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21089 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21092 \begin_layout Description
21097 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21098 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21099 Except for the first page, if
21102 \begin_inset space ~
21110 \begin_layout Description
21114 \begin_inset space ~
21119 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21120 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21123 \begin_layout Description
21128 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21129 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21130 except for the last page, if
21133 \begin_inset space ~
21141 \begin_layout Description
21145 \begin_inset space ~
21150 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21151 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21154 \begin_layout Description
21155 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21156 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21162 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21165 \begin_inset space ~
21173 \begin_layout Standard
21174 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21175 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21176 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21182 In this context, first means first in this order:
21185 \begin_inset space ~
21197 \begin_inset space ~
21202 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21205 \begin_layout Standard
21207 \begin_inset Tabular
21208 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21209 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21210 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21211 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21212 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21213 <row endfirsthead="true">
21214 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21225 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <row endfirsthead="true">
21245 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <row endhead="true">
21278 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <row endhead="true">
21309 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <row endfoot="true">
21342 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21362 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21393 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22352 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22363 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22394 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22456 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22518 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22549 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22580 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <row endlastfoot="true">
23324 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 \begin_layout Subsection
23363 \begin_inset Index idx
23366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23375 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23382 \begin_layout Standard
23383 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23384 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23385 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23386 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23390 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23393 \begin_layout Standard
23394 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23395 for the column in the table dialog.
23396 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23397 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23401 \begin_layout Standard
23403 \begin_inset Tabular
23404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23405 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23407 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23497 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 This is longer now.
23558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23610 This is longer now.
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 \begin_layout Standard
23642 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23643 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23649 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23655 Selection with the mouse or with
23659 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23660 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23661 the selection from outside the table.
23664 \begin_layout Section
23666 \begin_inset Index idx
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23685 \begin_layout Subsection
23689 \begin_layout Standard
23690 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23691 have a fixed location.
23693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23700 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23708 \begin_inset space ~
23713 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23714 too many notes on the current page.
23717 \begin_layout Standard
23718 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23719 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23720 and pages without text.
23721 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23722 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23723 Floats are therefore numbered.
23724 Referencing is described in section
23725 \begin_inset space ~
23729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23731 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23738 \begin_layout Standard
23739 To insert a float, use the menu
23741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23745 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23746 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23748 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23749 \begin_inset Index idx
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23759 paragraph within the float.
23760 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23761 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23762 left-clicking on the box label.
23763 A closed float box looks like this:
23764 \begin_inset Graphics
23765 filename clipart/float.png
23770 – a gray button with a red label.
23773 \begin_layout Standard
23774 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23776 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23779 \begin_layout Subsection
23781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23783 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23788 \begin_inset Index idx
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 Floats ! Figure floats
23800 \begin_layout Standard
23802 \begin_inset space ~
23806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23808 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23812 was created using the menu
23814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23815 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23821 arg "float-insert figure"
23825 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23834 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23838 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23839 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23841 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23843 \begin_inset space ~
23851 arg "layout-paragraph"
23857 \begin_layout Standard
23858 \begin_inset Float figure
23863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 \begin_inset Graphics
23866 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23881 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23885 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23898 \begin_layout Standard
23899 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23900 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23911 ) and refer to it using the menu
23913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23919 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23923 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23924 vague references like
23925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23932 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23933 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23943 For more about cross-references, see section
23944 \begin_inset space ~
23948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23950 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23957 \begin_layout Standard
23958 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23959 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23960 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23961 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23962 as described in section
23963 \begin_inset space ~
23967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23969 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23975 \begin_inset space ~
23979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23981 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23985 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23986 You can also set the images one below the other.
23988 \begin_inset space ~
23992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23994 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24001 reference "fig:Platypus"
24005 are the subfigures.
24008 \begin_layout Standard
24009 \begin_inset Float figure
24014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24019 \begin_inset Float figure
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24030 name "fig:Undefinable"
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 \begin_inset Graphics
24044 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
24055 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24059 \begin_inset Float figure
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24065 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24070 name "fig:Platypus"
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 \begin_inset Graphics
24084 filename clipart/platypus.eps
24096 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24103 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24108 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
24112 Two distorted images.
24125 \begin_layout Subsection
24127 \begin_inset Index idx
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 Floats ! Table floats
24139 \begin_layout Standard
24140 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24143 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24146 or the toolbar button
24149 arg "float-insert table"
24153 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24154 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24155 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24157 \begin_inset space ~
24161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24163 reference "tab:Table-float"
24170 \begin_layout Standard
24171 \begin_inset Float table
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24182 name "tab:Table-float"
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 \begin_inset Tabular
24197 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24198 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24352 \end{array}\right]$
24360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24373 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24394 \begin_layout Subsection
24396 \begin_inset Index idx
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 \begin_layout Standard
24410 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24411 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24412 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24414 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24422 \begin_inset space ~
24430 \begin_layout Section
24432 \begin_inset Index idx
24435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 \begin_layout Standard
24446 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24448 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24449 \begin_inset space \space{}
24456 \begin_layout Standard
24457 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24458 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24464 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24465 and its alignment within the page.
24468 \begin_layout Standard
24470 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24480 height_special "totalheight"
24485 backgroundcolor "none"
24488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 This is a minipage.
24492 The text is set in an italic style.
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24499 another formatting.
24507 \begin_layout Standard
24508 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24511 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
24515 as described in section
24516 \begin_inset space ~
24520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24522 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24527 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24533 \begin_layout Standard
24534 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24544 height_special "totalheight"
24549 backgroundcolor "none"
24552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24553 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24554 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24560 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24564 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24574 height_special "totalheight"
24579 backgroundcolor "none"
24582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24583 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24584 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24592 \begin_layout Standard
24593 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24599 \begin_layout Standard
24600 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24602 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24609 \begin_inset space ~
24617 \begin_layout Chapter
24618 Mathematical Formulas
24619 \begin_inset Index idx
24622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24629 \begin_inset Index idx
24632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24663 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24670 \begin_layout Standard
24671 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24676 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24679 \begin_layout Section
24681 \begin_inset Index idx
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24693 \begin_layout Standard
24694 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24707 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24709 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24710 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24711 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24719 \begin_layout Standard
24720 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24724 \begin_inset space ~
24729 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24732 \begin_layout Standard
24733 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24734 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24737 \begin_layout Standard
24738 This is a line with an inline formula
24739 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24745 \begin_layout Standard
24746 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24747 paragraph, like this one:
24748 \begin_inset Formula
24755 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24758 \begin_layout Standard
24760 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24762 For example, typing
24763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24776 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24777 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24781 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24784 \begin_inset space ~
24792 \begin_layout Subsection
24793 Navigating in Formulas
24794 \begin_inset Index idx
24797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24806 \begin_layout Standard
24807 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24808 achieved with the arrow keys.
24810 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24811 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24816 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24817 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24821 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24825 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24828 \end{array}\right]$
24836 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24841 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24842 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24845 \begin_layout Standard
24850 , printed in this document as
24851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24855 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24862 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24863 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24864 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24869 For example, if you want
24870 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24878 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24888 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24892 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24897 , since in the latter case only the
24900 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24905 will be under the square root sign:
24906 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24912 \begin_layout Standard
24913 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24915 \begin_inset Formula
24917 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24926 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24927 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24930 \begin_layout Subsection
24934 \begin_layout Standard
24935 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24936 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24940 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24941 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24942 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24943 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24944 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24948 \begin_layout Subsection
24949 Exponents and Subscripts
24950 \begin_inset Index idx
24953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24960 \begin_inset Index idx
24963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24972 \begin_layout Standard
24973 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24976 arg "math-superscript"
24982 arg "math-subscript"
24985 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24987 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24990 , type in a formula
24993 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25003 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25009 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25013 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25019 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25025 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25034 , you have to use an extra
25038 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25039 For example, if you want
25040 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25046 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25052 Subscripts are similar: To get
25053 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25059 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25067 \begin_layout Subsection
25069 \begin_inset Index idx
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25081 \begin_layout Standard
25082 Create a fraction either with the command
25088 or by using the icon
25091 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25097 \begin_inset space ~
25103 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25104 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25105 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25110 To move back up, press
25115 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25116 \begin_inset Formula
25118 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25121 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25129 \begin_layout Subsection
25131 \begin_inset Index idx
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 \begin_layout Standard
25144 Roots can be created using the
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25155 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25161 arg "math-insert \\root"
25183 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25189 always produces a square root.
25192 \begin_layout Subsection
25193 Operators with Limits
25194 \begin_inset Index idx
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 \begin_inset Index idx
25207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25216 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25223 \begin_layout Standard
25225 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25229 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25232 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25233 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25234 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25235 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25236 The sum operator will automatically place its
25237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25244 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25246 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25250 \begin_inset Formula
25252 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25257 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25261 \begin_layout Standard
25262 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25264 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25265 behind the operator and using the menu
25267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25268 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25270 \begin_inset space ~
25274 \begin_inset space ~
25288 \begin_layout Standard
25289 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25298 \begin_inset Index idx
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 \begin_inset Formula
25310 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25315 which will place the
25316 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25328 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25329 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25335 \begin_layout Standard
25336 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25343 Have a look at section
25344 \begin_inset space ~
25348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25350 reference "subsec:Functions"
25354 for an explanation of function macros.
25357 \begin_layout Subsection
25359 \begin_inset Index idx
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25371 \begin_layout Standard
25372 Most math symbols can be found in the
25375 \begin_inset space ~
25380 under one of several categories; including
25397 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25401 \begin_layout Standard
25402 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25403 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25404 don't have to use the
25407 \begin_inset space ~
25412 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25414 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25417 \begin_layout Subsection
25419 \begin_inset Index idx
25422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25431 \begin_layout Standard
25432 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25438 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25444 \begin_inset space ~
25452 arg "math-insert \\space"
25456 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25457 For example, the sequence
25462 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25465 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25467 \begin_inset Graphics
25468 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25473 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25474 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25475 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25476 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25477 , because they are negative
25479 Here are two examples:
25482 \begin_layout Standard
25492 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25498 \begin_layout Standard
25508 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25514 \begin_layout Subsection
25516 \begin_inset Index idx
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25528 name "subsec:Functions"
25535 \begin_layout Standard
25539 \begin_inset space ~
25544 contains under the button
25547 arg "math-insert \\functions"
25550 a number of function macros, such as
25551 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25555 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25563 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25570 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25571 avoid confusions, because
25572 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25576 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25582 \begin_layout Standard
25583 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25585 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25589 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25595 \begin_layout Standard
25596 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25597 are placed, as described in section
25598 \begin_inset space ~
25602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25604 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25611 \begin_layout Subsection
25613 \begin_inset Index idx
25616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25625 \begin_layout Standard
25626 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25628 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25629 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25630 commands, for example, to enter
25631 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25634 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25635 Our example is entered by typing
25640 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25647 \begin_inset space ~
25651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25653 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25657 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25660 \begin_layout Standard
25661 \begin_inset Float table
25666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25667 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25672 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25676 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25686 \begin_inset Tabular
25687 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25688 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25689 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25690 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25775 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25829 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25883 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25937 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25991 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26045 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26099 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26153 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26207 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26252 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26273 \begin_layout Standard
26274 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26277 \begin_inset space ~
26285 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26288 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26292 \begin_layout Section
26293 Brackets and Delimiters
26294 \begin_inset Index idx
26297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26304 \begin_inset Index idx
26307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26316 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26323 \begin_layout Standard
26324 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26326 For some purposes, using just the keys
26331 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26332 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26333 toolbar delimiter icon
26336 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26340 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26341 \begin_inset Formula
26343 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26351 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26352 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26356 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26359 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26365 \begin_inset Formula
26367 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26375 \begin_layout Standard
26376 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26377 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26381 \begin_layout Standard
26382 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26383 left side and right side.
26384 If you use the option
26387 \begin_inset space ~
26392 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26393 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26395 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26400 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26401 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26404 \begin_layout Standard
26405 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26406 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26407 is to go inside the brackets.
26408 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26413 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26414 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26415 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26419 arg "math-delim ( )"
26425 \begin_layout Section
26426 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
26427 \begin_inset Index idx
26430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 \begin_inset Index idx
26440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 \begin_inset Index idx
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26459 \begin_layout Standard
26460 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26464 \begin_inset space ~
26472 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26476 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
26477 Here is an example:
26478 \begin_inset Formula
26480 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26489 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26490 \begin_inset space ~
26494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26496 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26501 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26502 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26503 This alignment is set in the box
26508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26557 for every column as default.
26558 For example, the sequence
26559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26570 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26571 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26572 corresponds to the relevant column.
26573 The result will look like this:
26574 \begin_inset Formula
26577 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26578 column & has & has\,right\\
26579 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26588 \begin_layout Standard
26589 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26592 arg "newline-insert newline"
26595 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26596 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26598 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26601 or the math toolbar.
26604 \begin_layout Standard
26605 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26606 It can be created with the menu
26608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26609 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26611 \begin_inset space ~
26623 Here is an example:
26624 \begin_inset Formula
26638 \begin_layout Standard
26639 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26642 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26645 arg "newline-insert newline"
26649 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26654 arg "newline-insert newline"
26657 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26665 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26666 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26667 A new row is created by every further entry of
26670 arg "newline-insert newline"
26674 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26675 Here is an example:
26676 \begin_inset Formula
26678 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26679 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26684 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26685 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26686 \begin_inset Formula
26688 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26696 \begin_layout Standard
26697 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26704 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26705 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26708 reference "eq:asquared"
26713 The other types are described in section
26714 \begin_inset space ~
26718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26720 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26727 \begin_layout Section
26728 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26729 \begin_inset Index idx
26732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26733 Math ! Formula numbering
26739 \begin_inset Index idx
26742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 Math ! Referencing formulas
26749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26751 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26758 \begin_layout Standard
26759 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26761 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26762 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26764 \begin_inset space ~
26768 \begin_inset space ~
26776 arg "math-number-toggle"
26780 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26781 within parentheses.
26782 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26783 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26784 the document class.
26785 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26786 separated by a dot:
26787 \begin_inset Formula
26797 arg "math-number-toggle"
26800 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26801 You can only number displayed formulas.
26804 \begin_layout Standard
26805 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26808 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26810 \begin_inset space ~
26814 \begin_inset space ~
26822 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26825 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26826 \begin_inset Formula
26829 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26835 To number all lines use the shortcut
26838 arg "math-number-toggle"
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26848 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26849 A label is inserted with the menu
26851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26860 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26861 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26862 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26874 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26875 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26876 We inserted in the following example the label
26877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26884 in the second line:
26885 \begin_inset Formula
26887 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26888 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26893 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26894 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26895 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26899 \begin_inset space ~
26907 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26911 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26912 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26913 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26914 as the formula number:
26917 \begin_layout Standard
26918 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26921 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26928 \begin_layout Standard
26929 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26930 's cross-reference box are described in section
26931 \begin_inset space ~
26935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26937 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26942 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26950 \begin_layout Section
26951 User defined math macros
26952 \begin_inset Index idx
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26964 \begin_layout Standard
26966 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26967 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26968 Math macros are explained in section
26971 \begin_inset space ~
26983 \begin_layout Section
26987 \begin_layout Subsection
26989 \begin_inset Index idx
26992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27001 \begin_layout Standard
27002 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27003 To set a font in a formula, use the
27006 \begin_inset space ~
27014 arg "math-insert \\font"
27017 , or enter its command, listed in table
27018 \begin_inset space ~
27022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27024 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27031 \begin_layout Standard
27032 \begin_inset Float table
27037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27038 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27043 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27047 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27057 \begin_inset Tabular
27058 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27059 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27060 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27093 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27147 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27180 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27207 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27234 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27268 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27295 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27329 \begin_layout Standard
27330 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27338 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27354 \begin_layout Standard
27355 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27356 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27361 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27362 space when you need a space in the box.
27363 Here is an example where
27364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27375 denotes the set of numbers:
27376 \begin_inset Formula
27378 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27386 \begin_layout Standard
27387 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27388 You can, for example, put a character in
27397 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27401 \begin_inset Newline newline
27404 So it is better not to use this feature.
27407 \begin_layout Standard
27408 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27413 \begin_inset Newline newline
27416 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27422 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27423 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27436 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27439 \begin_layout Standard
27440 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27443 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27445 \begin_inset space ~
27453 \begin_layout Subsection
27455 \begin_inset Index idx
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 \begin_layout Standard
27468 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27470 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27474 \begin_inset space ~
27478 \begin_inset space ~
27486 \begin_inset space ~
27494 arg "math-insert \\font"
27498 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27499 in black instead of blue.
27500 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27501 Here is an example:
27502 \begin_inset Formula
27505 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27506 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27515 \begin_layout Subsection
27517 \begin_inset Index idx
27520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27529 \begin_layout Standard
27530 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27531 automatically chosen in most situations.
27549 For most characters,
27557 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27558 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27563 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27564 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27565 thinks are appropriate.
27566 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27569 arg "math-insert \\style"
27573 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27574 For example, you can set
27575 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27578 , which is normally in
27587 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27591 The four styles are used in the following example:
27594 \begin_layout Standard
27595 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27599 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27603 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27607 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27613 \begin_layout Standard
27614 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27615 is set in a particular size with the menu
27617 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27619 \begin_inset space ~
27624 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27625 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27626 will be adjusted to correspond.
27627 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27642 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27648 \begin_layout Section
27649 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27651 \begin_inset Index idx
27654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27661 \begin_inset Index idx
27664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27673 \begin_layout Standard
27675 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27676 that are in common use.
27679 \begin_layout Subsection
27680 Enabling AMS-Support
27683 \begin_layout Standard
27684 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27685 the document by selecting the checkbox
27688 \begin_inset space ~
27692 \begin_inset space ~
27696 \begin_inset space ~
27703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27707 \begin_inset Index idx
27710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27711 Document ! Settings
27719 \begin_inset space ~
27725 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27726 -errors in formulas,
27727 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27730 \begin_layout Subsection
27732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27734 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27739 \begin_inset Index idx
27742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27743 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27751 \begin_layout Standard
27752 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27753 provides a selection of different formula types.
27755 allows you to choose between
27776 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27777 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27784 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27787 \begin_layout Chapter
27791 \begin_layout Section
27793 \begin_inset Index idx
27796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27805 name "sec:Cross-References"
27812 \begin_layout Standard
27813 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27814 's strengths is cross-references.
27815 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27817 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27818 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27819 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27822 \begin_layout Enumerate
27826 \begin_layout Enumerate
27827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27829 name "enu:Second-item"
27836 \begin_layout Enumerate
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27841 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27846 or by pressing the toolbar button
27853 A gray label box like this:
27854 \begin_inset Graphics
27855 filename clipart/label.png
27859 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27861 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27896 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27897 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27919 or the toolbar button
27922 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27926 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27927 \begin_inset Graphics
27928 filename clipart/reference.png
27932 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27934 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27947 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27951 \begin_layout Standard
27952 As an alternative to
27954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27957 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27962 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27963 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27965 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27978 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27979 \begin_inset space ~
27983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27985 reference "enu:Second-item"
27992 \begin_layout Standard
27993 It is recommended to use a protected space
27997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27998 described in section
27999 \begin_inset space ~
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28005 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28014 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28015 line breaks between them.
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28019 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28022 \begin_layout Description
28023 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28026 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
28033 \begin_layout Description
28034 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28035 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28047 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28054 \begin_layout Description
28055 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28056 \begin_inset space ~
28060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28061 LatexCommand pageref
28062 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
28069 \begin_layout Description
28071 \begin_inset space ~
28075 \begin_inset space ~
28078 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28080 LatexCommand vpageref
28081 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
28086 \begin_inset Newline newline
28089 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28090 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28091 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28092 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28093 it prints “on the next page”.
28094 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28097 \begin_layout Description
28099 \begin_inset space ~
28103 \begin_inset space ~
28107 \begin_inset space ~
28110 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28113 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
28118 \begin_inset Newline newline
28121 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28127 ; otherwise it behaves like
28131 \begin_inset space ~
28135 \begin_inset space ~
28144 \begin_layout Description
28146 \begin_inset space ~
28149 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28150 \begin_inset Newline newline
28154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28162 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28172 \begin_inset Index idx
28175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28177 packages ! prettyref
28183 \begin_inset Index idx
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28188 packages ! refstyle
28199 \begin_inset Newline newline
28202 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28203 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28206 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28219 is the default and preferred because
28223 supports only English documents.
28224 The format is specified by using the command
28236 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28237 preamble of the document.
28238 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28256 \begin_inset Newline newline
28263 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28268 \begin_inset Newline newline
28279 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28280 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28282 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28283 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28288 , you might do so as follows:
28289 \begin_inset Newline newline
28296 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28301 \begin_inset Newline newline
28304 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28305 the package documentation
28306 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28308 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28314 \begin_inset Newline newline
28325 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28332 \begin_layout Description
28334 \begin_inset space ~
28337 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28339 LatexCommand nameref
28340 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
28347 \begin_layout Description
28349 \begin_inset space ~
28352 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28353 label for the reference:
28354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28355 LatexCommand labelonly
28356 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
28361 \begin_inset Newline newline
28364 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28365 Code, if you want to issue a command
28366 that \SpecialChar LyX
28372 , then you may want to use the
28375 \begin_inset space ~
28380 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28390 This is the form needed for e.
28391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28395 \begin_inset space \space{}
28402 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28403 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28405 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28409 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28413 \begin_layout Standard
28414 You can only use the style
28418 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28422 is always possible.
28425 \begin_layout Standard
28426 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28427 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28429 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28430 \begin_inset space ~
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28436 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28444 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28448 \begin_inset space ~
28452 \begin_inset space ~
28457 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28458 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28461 \begin_inset space ~
28466 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28467 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28470 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28476 \begin_layout Standard
28477 You can change labels at any time.
28478 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28479 do not need to think about this.
28482 \begin_layout Standard
28483 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28485 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28489 \begin_layout Standard
28490 References are described in detail in the section
28491 \begin_inset space ~
28501 \begin_inset space ~
28509 \begin_layout Section
28510 Table of Contents and other Listings
28511 \begin_inset Index idx
28514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28521 \begin_inset Index idx
28524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28525 Navigating ! Outline
28531 \begin_inset Index idx
28534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28550 \begin_layout Subsection
28552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28554 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28561 \begin_layout Standard
28562 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28565 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28567 \begin_inset space ~
28571 \begin_inset space ~
28577 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28579 If you click on it, the
28583 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28584 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28585 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28587 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28589 \begin_inset space ~
28594 that is described in section
28595 \begin_inset space ~
28599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28601 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28608 \begin_layout Standard
28609 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28610 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28612 \begin_inset space ~
28616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28618 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28622 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28624 \begin_inset space ~
28628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28630 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28634 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28636 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28639 \begin_layout Subsection
28640 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28643 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28650 \begin_layout Standard
28651 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28653 You can insert them via the
28655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28659 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28662 \begin_layout Section
28663 URLs and Hyperlinks
28664 \begin_inset Index idx
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 \begin_inset Index idx
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28686 \begin_layout Subsection
28688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28697 \begin_layout Standard
28698 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28706 \begin_layout Standard
28707 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28709 \begin_inset Flex URL
28712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28722 \begin_layout Standard
28723 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28729 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28733 \begin_layout Standard
28734 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28742 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28751 \begin_layout Subsection
28753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28755 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28762 \begin_layout Standard
28763 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28768 or with the toolbar button
28775 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28784 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28785 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28786 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28788 name "LyX's homepage"
28789 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28794 , an Email address like this:
28795 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28797 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28798 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28804 , or a link to a file.
28807 \begin_layout Standard
28808 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28821 to the link target.
28824 \begin_layout Standard
28825 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28826 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28827 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28828 the text style dialog.
28829 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28835 name "LyX's homepage"
28836 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28844 \begin_layout Standard
28845 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28849 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28852 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28856 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28858 \begin_inset Newline newline
28866 \begin_inset Newline newline
28873 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28876 \begin_layout Section
28878 \begin_inset Index idx
28881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28890 name "sec:Appendices"
28897 \begin_layout Standard
28898 Appendices are created with the menu
28900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28902 \begin_inset space ~
28906 \begin_inset space ~
28912 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28913 as the appendix part of the book.
28914 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28917 \begin_layout Standard
28918 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28919 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28920 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28921 and the subsection number.
28922 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28926 \begin_layout Standard
28928 \begin_inset space ~
28932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28934 reference "chap:Credits"
28939 \begin_inset space ~
28943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28945 reference "subsec:Export"
28952 \begin_layout Section
28954 \begin_inset Index idx
28957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28966 name "sec:Bibliography"
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28974 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28976 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28977 \begin_inset space ~
28981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28983 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28990 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28995 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28996 \begin_inset space ~
29000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29002 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29007 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29008 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29009 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29013 using a bibliography database.
29016 \begin_layout Standard
29017 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29018 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29022 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29023 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29024 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29025 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29026 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29029 \begin_layout Subsection
29030 The Bibliography Environment
29031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29033 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29040 \begin_layout Standard
29045 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29047 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29056 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29058 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29059 of ASCII characters only.
29063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29068 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29074 \begin_inset Newline newline
29078 \begin_inset Flex URL
29081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29083 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
29095 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29105 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29108 \begin_layout Standard
29109 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29114 or the toolbar button
29117 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29121 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29122 containing the available citations.
29123 Select one or more keys from the list and
29133 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29134 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29138 \begin_layout Standard
29139 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
29140 entry with surrounding brackets.
29145 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
29146 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29158 \begin_layout Standard
29162 Companion Second Edition
29165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29167 key "latexcompanion"
29175 \begin_layout Standard
29176 The \SpecialChar LyX
29177 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29178 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29188 \begin_layout Standard
29189 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29196 \begin_inset Index idx
29199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29207 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29219 Author A and Author B(Year)
29220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29227 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29229 Then, if you select
29232 \begin_inset space ~
29237 in the document settings
29238 \begin_inset Index idx
29241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29242 Document ! Settings
29249 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29251 \begin_inset space ~
29257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29259 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29266 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29270 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29275 \begin_inset space ~
29283 arg "layout-paragraph"
29287 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29290 \begin_layout Subsection
29291 Bibliography databases
29292 \begin_inset Index idx
29295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29296 Bibliography ! Databases
29302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29304 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29311 \begin_layout Standard
29312 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29318 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29320 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29321 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29326 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29328 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29329 your working field in a database.
29330 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29331 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29332 list for that document.
29333 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29337 \begin_layout Standard
29338 The database is a text file with the file extension
29339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29350 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29351 The format is explained in
29352 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29359 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29363 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29369 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29370 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29371 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29373 \begin_inset Flex URL
29376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29378 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29388 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29389 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29390 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29392 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29394 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
29395 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
29396 Those are addressed by
29401 \begin_inset Index idx
29404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29406 packages ! biblatex
29412 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29413 (although it has been significantly
29414 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29424 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29425 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29426 might conversely fail to correctly
29427 handle databases that use specific
29436 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
29440 \begin_layout Standard
29441 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29446 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
29448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29452 \begin_inset Index idx
29455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29456 Document ! Settings
29468 \begin_inset space ~
29473 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29482 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29484 \begin_inset Index idx
29487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29488 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29497 \begin_layout Standard
29498 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29506 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29508 \begin_inset space ~
29514 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
29515 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29523 Add bibliography to TOC
29525 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29530 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29531 in the document or just the cited references.
29534 \begin_layout Standard
29535 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29536 style file is a text file with the file extension
29537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29548 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29549 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29550 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29551 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29553 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29559 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29560 \begin_inset Newline newline
29564 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29566 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29576 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29581 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29586 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29591 \begin_inset Index idx
29594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29595 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29601 \begin_inset Index idx
29604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29606 packages ! biblatex
29614 \begin_layout Standard
29615 Accessing a database via
29619 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29627 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29629 \begin_inset space ~
29635 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29636 you cannot select a
29641 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29645 \begin_layout Standard
29650 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29663 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29664 file (text file with the file extension
29665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29676 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29677 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29679 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29688 styles are not set in the
29691 \begin_inset space ~
29696 dialog, but in the document settings.
29697 \begin_inset Index idx
29700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29701 Document ! Settings
29706 However, in the dialog in the
29710 field, which is only visible if you use
29714 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29715 example how its heading will appear).
29716 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29732 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29733 \begin_inset space ~
29737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29739 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29750 Bibliography Processors
29753 \begin_layout Standard
29754 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29755 uses a bibliography processor,
29756 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29757 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29758 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29760 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29761 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29764 \begin_layout Standard
29765 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29767 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29768 You can do this on a general level in
29770 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29771 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29772 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29775 or for individual documents in
29777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29778 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29782 The following variants are available by default:
29785 \begin_layout Description
29786 biber a specific, modern processor
29787 \begin_inset Index idx
29790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29797 developed exclusively for
29801 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29807 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29812 makes use of; if you use the
29816 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29823 \begin_layout Description
29824 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29825 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29826 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29830 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29833 \begin_layout Description
29834 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29835 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29839 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29843 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29847 features are supported.
29850 \begin_layout Standard
29851 By default (with the
29857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29858 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29872 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29873 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29876 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29877 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29890 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29891 -based bibliography styles).
29892 This should suit most needs.
29895 \begin_layout Standard
29896 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29897 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29898 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29903 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29904 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29905 You can adjust it in
29907 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29908 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29909 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29915 \begin_layout Standard
29916 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29917 can add below the selection.
29918 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29919 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29925 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29941 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29943 These are explained in detail in section
29945 Customizing Bibliographies
29949 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29954 Additional Features
29959 \begin_layout Subsection
29961 \begin_inset Index idx
29964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29965 Bibliography ! Citation format
29971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29973 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29980 \begin_layout Standard
29981 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29986 \begin_inset space \space{}
29989 numerical citation (as
29990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29997 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30005 ) or author-year citations (as
30006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30015 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30019 \begin_layout Standard
30020 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30024 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30028 \begin_inset Index idx
30031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30032 Document ! Settings
30037 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30043 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30044 labels, is there to use
30047 \begin_inset space ~
30058 \begin_inset space ~
30063 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30066 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30074 With a bibliography database (see
30075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30077 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30084 ) one has in contrary to the
30088 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30089 These style formats are available:
30092 \begin_layout Description
30094 \begin_inset space ~
30097 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30098 -based approached without any additional packages
30099 (simple numeric citations).
30102 \begin_layout Description
30103 Biblatex loads the package
30108 \begin_inset Index idx
30111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30113 packages ! biblatex
30118 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30120 Biblatex citation style
30124 Biblatex bibliography style
30127 Options to the package
30131 can be entered in the
30138 \begin_layout Description
30140 \begin_inset space ~
30144 \begin_inset space ~
30147 mode) loads the package
30151 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30152 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30164 behavior very closely.
30169 this option has some additional styles.
30174 styles are also supported by this variant.
30177 \begin_layout Description
30179 \begin_inset space ~
30182 (BibTeX) loads the package
30187 \begin_inset Index idx
30190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30197 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30200 \begin_layout Description
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30205 (BibTeX) loads the package
30210 \begin_inset Index idx
30213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30220 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30223 \begin_layout Standard
30232 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30234 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30243 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30245 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30246 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30248 Biblatex citation style
30251 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30257 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30263 are available in the
30268 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30269 a name prefix such as
30270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30285 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30290 \begin_inset space \space{}
30294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30305 \begin_layout Standard
30306 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30312 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30327 Here is a simple example where the text
30328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30332 \begin_inset space ~
30336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30339 appears after the reference:
30342 \begin_layout Quote
30344 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30347 key "latexcompanion"
30355 \begin_layout Standard
30356 All styles except for
30360 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
30362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30370 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30374 \begin_layout Standard
30375 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30376 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
30377 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
30382 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
30383 multi-citation (so-called
30384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30387 qualified citation lists
30388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30394 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
30399 dialog will display three columns in the field
30406 \begin_inset space ~
30414 \begin_inset space ~
30422 \begin_inset space ~
30428 If you double-click on an item's
30431 \begin_inset space ~
30439 \begin_inset space ~
30444 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30447 General text before
30453 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30456 \begin_layout Section
30458 \begin_inset Index idx
30461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30477 \begin_layout Standard
30478 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30482 \begin_inset space ~
30487 or the toolbar button
30494 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30495 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30496 by \SpecialChar LyX
30497 as the index entry.
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30501 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30504 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30506 \begin_inset space ~
30512 A light blue box labeled
30513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30524 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30525 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30530 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30531 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30532 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30533 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30535 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30537 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30545 \begin_layout Subsection
30546 Grouping Index Entries
30547 \begin_inset Index idx
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30562 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30563 lists under the entry
30564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30572 First we create the entry
30573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30581 \begin_inset space ~
30585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30587 reference "subsec:Lists"
30592 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30593 \begin_inset space ~
30597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30599 reference "sec:Itemize"
30603 , we insert the command
30606 \begin_layout Standard
30612 \begin_layout Standard
30616 \begin_layout Standard
30622 \begin_layout Standard
30623 for the enumerated list in section
30624 \begin_inset space ~
30628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30630 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30638 The exclamation mark
30639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30646 marks the grouping levels.
30647 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30648 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30649 If we don't have an index entry for
30650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30657 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30660 \begin_layout Subsection
30662 \begin_inset Index idx
30665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30666 Index ! Page ranges
30674 \begin_layout Standard
30675 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30677 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30678 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30679 an index entry in section
30680 \begin_inset space ~
30684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30686 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30693 \begin_layout Standard
30696 Paragraph environments|(
30699 \begin_layout Standard
30700 and another entry at the end of section
30701 \begin_inset space ~
30705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30707 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30714 \begin_layout Standard
30717 Paragraph environments|)
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30745 respectively start and end the index range.
30746 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30747 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30748 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30749 An example is the index entry
30750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30753 Document ! Settings
30754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30760 \begin_layout Subsection
30762 \begin_inset Index idx
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30766 Index ! Cross referencing
30774 \begin_layout Standard
30775 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30776 We referred for example in the index entry
30777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30785 \begin_inset space ~
30789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30791 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30795 ) to the index entry
30796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30803 in the same section using the entry
30806 \begin_layout Standard
30809 GIF|see{Image formats}
30812 \begin_layout Standard
30813 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30815 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30816 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30819 \begin_layout Subsection
30821 \begin_inset Index idx
30824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30825 Index ! Entry order
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30835 follow the rules for the index order.
30836 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30842 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30844 \begin_inset space ~
30848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30850 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30859 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30860 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30885 \begin_inset Index idx
30888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 Dummy entries ! maïs
30895 \begin_inset Index idx
30898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 Dummy entries ! maître
30905 \begin_inset Index idx
30908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30909 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30914 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30915 maïs, maison, maître.
30916 To achieve this, we use the command
30919 \begin_layout Standard
30922 previous entry@current entry
30925 \begin_layout Standard
30926 In our case we want to have
30927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30942 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30945 \begin_layout Standard
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30953 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30955 See the next subsection for an example.
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30965 \begin_layout Standard
30966 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30971 to generate the index (see section
30972 \begin_inset space ~
30976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30978 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30987 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30988 -package aeguill in section
30989 \begin_inset space ~
30993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30995 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30999 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
31000 -packages although all these index
31001 commands start with
31002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31015 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
31020 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31035 \begin_layout Standard
31047 \begin_layout Subsection
31049 \begin_inset Index idx
31052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31053 Index ! Entry layout
31061 \begin_layout Standard
31062 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31063 \begin_inset Index idx
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31069 This is an italic dummy entry
31074 You can also format the page number using the character
31075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31082 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31083 -command without a backslash.
31084 We can write for example
31087 \begin_layout Standard
31090 italic page number:|textit
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31094 to get the page number in italic.
31095 \begin_inset Index idx
31098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31099 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31104 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31105 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31123 \begin_inset space ~
31129 Have a look at section
31130 \begin_inset space ~
31134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31136 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31140 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31144 \begin_layout Standard
31145 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31153 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31157 to generate the index, see section
31158 \begin_inset space ~
31162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31164 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31173 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31178 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31182 key "latexcompanion"
31195 \begin_layout Standard
31196 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31198 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31199 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31200 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31201 If so, put the following in the preamble
31204 \begin_layout Standard
31216 \begin_layout Standard
31220 \begin_layout Standard
31226 \begin_layout Standard
31227 in the index entry.
31228 \begin_inset Index idx
31231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31232 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31237 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31238 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31239 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31242 \begin_layout Standard
31243 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31244 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31245 a bold font for all index entries.
31246 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31258 documentation for details,
31259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31261 key "makeindex,xindy"
31269 \begin_layout Subsection
31271 \begin_inset Index idx
31274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31283 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31290 \begin_layout Standard
31291 If the index generation program
31295 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31296 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31300 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31301 distribution, is used.
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31311 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31312 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31313 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31314 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31324 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31326 dialog, see section
31327 \begin_inset space ~
31331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31333 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31338 The available options are listed and explained in
31339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31341 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31347 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31351 \begin_layout Standard
31352 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31353 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31361 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31362 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31365 \begin_layout Subsection
31369 \begin_layout Standard
31370 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31371 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31379 next to the standard index.
31381 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31382 that add this feature.
31389 \begin_inset Index idx
31392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31394 packages ! splitidx
31399 package to generate multiple indexes.
31400 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31406 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31416 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31417 style, but it also includes
31418 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31419 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31427 \begin_layout Standard
31428 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31429 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31432 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31435 and select the option
31437 Use multiple Indexes
31444 already contains the standard index
31445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31453 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31454 also appear as a heading) to the
31458 input field and press the
31463 The new index now also appears in the list.
31464 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31465 label color to the new index.
31468 \begin_layout Standard
31469 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31479 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31480 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31481 are additional features:
31484 \begin_layout Itemize
31485 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31486 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31489 \begin_layout Itemize
31490 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31491 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31499 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31500 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31501 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31502 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31505 \begin_layout Section
31506 Nomenclature/Glossary
31507 \begin_inset Index idx
31510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31517 \begin_inset Index idx
31520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31551 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31558 \begin_layout Standard
31559 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31560 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31561 called nomenclature or glossary.
31564 \begin_layout Standard
31565 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31572 \begin_inset Index idx
31575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31583 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31585 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31592 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31597 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31598 and then use the menu
31600 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31606 \begin_inset space ~
31611 or the toolbar button
31614 arg "nomencl-insert"
31619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31630 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31633 \begin_layout Standard
31634 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31635 The first is the term or
31639 that you wish to define.
31644 of the term or symbol.
31647 \begin_layout Standard
31648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31656 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31657 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31665 \begin_layout Subsection
31666 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31667 \begin_inset Index idx
31670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31671 Nomenclature ! Layout
31679 \begin_layout Standard
31680 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31684 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31691 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31699 \begin_inset Newline newline
31707 \begin_inset Newline newline
31713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31720 character starts/ends the formula.
31721 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31722 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31734 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31744 \begin_layout Standard
31745 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31746 -syntax is given in section
31747 \begin_inset space ~
31751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31753 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31760 \begin_layout Standard
31764 \begin_inset space ~
31769 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31771 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31776 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31783 in this document is:
31784 \begin_inset Newline newline
31789 dummy entry for the character
31794 \begin_inset Newline newline
31806 \begin_inset space ~
31816 font use the command
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31846 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31851 \begin_inset space \space{}
31855 \begin_inset Newline newline
31871 \begin_inset Newline newline
31874 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31875 This command will make the font of all symbols
31882 \begin_inset space ~
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 If the characters |
31892 \begin_inset space \space{}
31896 \begin_inset space \space{}
31900 \begin_inset space \space{}
31904 \begin_inset space \space{}
31908 \begin_inset space \space{}
31911 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31912 a quote character in front of them.
31913 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31914 LatexCommand nomenclature
31915 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31916 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31924 \begin_layout Subsection
31925 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31926 \begin_inset Index idx
31929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31930 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31938 \begin_layout Standard
31939 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31940 -code of the symbol
31942 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31944 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31947 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31948 LatexCommand nomenclature
31950 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31958 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31962 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31963 LatexCommand nomenclature
31966 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31972 They will be sorted by
31973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31999 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32002 will be sorted before the
32006 since the character
32007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32014 is considered in sorting.
32017 \begin_layout Standard
32018 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32026 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32027 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32029 For the example given, you can insert
32033 in this field for the
32034 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32041 will be located before
32042 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32048 \begin_layout Standard
32049 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32064 \begin_layout Subsection
32065 Nomenclature Options
32066 \begin_inset Index idx
32069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32070 Nomenclature ! Options
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32083 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32084 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32087 \begin_layout Description
32088 refeq Appends the phrase
32089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32104 to every nomenclature entry, where
32110 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32113 \begin_layout Description
32114 refpage Appends the phrase
32115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32130 to every nomenclature entry, where
32136 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32139 \begin_layout Description
32140 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32143 \begin_layout Standard
32144 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32145 class options list in the
32147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32151 In this document the options
32158 \begin_layout Standard
32159 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32165 \begin_layout Standard
32166 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32167 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32172 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32175 \begin_layout Description
32185 \begin_layout Description
32188 nomrefpage Like the
32195 \begin_layout Description
32198 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32207 \begin_layout Description
32211 \begin_inset space ~
32217 \begin_inset space ~
32222 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32225 \begin_layout Standard
32227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32234 are automatically translated for some document languages.
32235 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32247 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
32250 \begin_inset Newline newline
32257 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
32262 \begin_inset Newline newline
32266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32281 by their translation.
32284 \begin_layout Subsection
32285 Printing the Nomenclature
32286 \begin_inset Index idx
32289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32290 Nomenclature ! Printing
32298 \begin_layout Standard
32299 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32302 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32318 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32319 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32320 You can choose between these settings:
32323 \begin_layout Description
32324 Default a space of 1
32325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32331 \begin_layout Description
32333 \begin_inset space ~
32337 \begin_inset space ~
32340 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32343 \begin_layout Description
32344 Custom custom space
32347 \begin_layout Standard
32348 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32357 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32365 For example, in order to change the name to
32369 , add the following line to the preamble:
32372 \begin_layout Standard
32380 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32383 \begin_layout Subsection
32384 Nomenclature Program
32385 \begin_inset Index idx
32388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32389 Nomenclature ! Program
32395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32397 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32404 \begin_layout Standard
32410 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32411 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32413 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32418 by adding options, see section
32419 \begin_inset space ~
32423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32425 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32430 The available options are listed and explained in
32431 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32433 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32441 \begin_layout Section
32443 \begin_inset Index idx
32446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32453 \begin_inset Index idx
32456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32457 Document ! Branches
32463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32465 name "sec:Branches"
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32473 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32474 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32475 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32476 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32479 \begin_layout Standard
32480 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32481 allows you to put text into branches.
32482 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32483 To create a branch, either select the menu
32485 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32486 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32489 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32498 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32499 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32500 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32501 and whether the name of the branch should
32502 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32503 (see below for an example).
32504 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32505 to the name of the other) and to add
32506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32518 \begin_inset space ~
32521 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32522 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32526 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32527 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32532 where you can choose a branch.
32533 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32537 \begin_layout Standard
32538 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32539 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32542 \begin_layout Standard
32543 \begin_inset Branch Question
32547 \begin_layout Standard
32552 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32560 \begin_layout Standard
32561 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32565 \begin_layout Standard
32570 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32589 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32590 Consider for example a file
32591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32598 which has the above branches.
32600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32607 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32631 branch were inactive,
32632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32647 branch was active, likewise
32648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32663 branch was active, and
32664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32667 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32671 if both branches were active.
32672 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32673 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32679 \begin_layout Standard
32680 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32686 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32687 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32691 \begin_inset space ~
32699 \begin_layout Standard
32700 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32704 \begin_layout Standard
32710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32717 branch is deactivated.
32723 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32729 \begin_layout Standard
32730 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32731 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32732 definitions for each branch.
32733 For example you can define for the question branch
32737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32738 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32739 -syntax, see section
32740 \begin_inset space ~
32744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32746 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32758 \begin_layout Standard
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32778 \begin_layout Standard
32779 and for the answer branch
32782 \begin_layout Standard
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32803 \begin_inset Branch Question
32807 \begin_layout Standard
32811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32839 \begin_layout Standard
32840 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32844 \begin_layout Standard
32848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32876 \begin_layout Standard
32877 Now it is possible to use the
32881 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32888 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32891 commands to obtain conditional output.
32892 Here is an example formula where only the
32899 \begin_inset Formula
32901 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32909 \begin_layout Standard
32910 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32918 \begin_layout Standard
32919 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32925 \begin_inset space \space{}
32928 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32930 For this advanced usage, see the
32936 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32941 \begin_layout Section
32943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32945 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32950 \begin_inset Index idx
32953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32966 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32969 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32971 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32977 \begin_inset Index idx
32980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32982 packages ! hyperref
32987 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32988 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32989 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32990 part of the document.
32994 \begin_layout Standard
32995 The header information in the dialog tab
32999 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33000 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33001 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33002 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33006 \begin_inset space ~
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33015 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33016 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33017 and author entries.
33021 \begin_inset space ~
33025 \begin_inset space ~
33029 \begin_inset space ~
33034 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33037 \begin_layout Standard
33038 You can specify in the dialog tab
33042 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33047 \begin_inset space ~
33051 \begin_inset space ~
33055 \begin_inset space ~
33060 option allows long links to be split;
33063 \begin_inset space ~
33067 \begin_inset space ~
33071 \begin_inset space ~
33079 \begin_inset space ~
33084 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33087 \begin_inset space ~
33092 colors the different links.
33093 The default colors are:
33096 \begin_layout Labeling
33097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33102 for hyperlinks and URLs
33105 \begin_layout Labeling
33106 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33114 \begin_layout Labeling
33115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33123 \begin_layout Standard
33124 but you can change these in the field
33129 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33132 \begin_layout Standard
33135 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33138 \begin_layout Standard
33143 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33144 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33145 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33153 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33154 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33155 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33165 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33166 when opening the PDF.
33168 \begin_inset space ~
33171 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33172 \begin_inset space ~
33175 1 will only display the sections.
33178 \begin_layout Standard
33179 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33180 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33186 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33187 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33197 \begin_layout Section
33199 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33203 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33210 \begin_layout Subsection
33213 \begin_inset Index idx
33216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33226 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33233 \begin_layout Standard
33234 As \SpecialChar LyX
33235 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33236 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33237 commands and constructs,
33240 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33241 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33242 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33243 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33244 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33245 cannot support all packages and
33249 \begin_layout Standard
33250 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33251 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33252 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33256 Code box is created by the menu
33258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33260 \begin_inset space ~
33265 or by the toolbar button
33278 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33286 \begin_layout Standard
33287 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33289 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33291 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33296 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33301 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33308 , you can write the command part
33314 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33315 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33319 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33320 Code box behind the word.
33321 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33322 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33326 \begin_layout Standard
33327 \begin_inset Graphics
33328 filename clipart/ERT.png
33336 \begin_layout Standard
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 This is a line with a
33345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33368 \begin_layout Standard
33369 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33377 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33378 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33379 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33380 know that the command is finished.
33388 \begin_layout Subsection
33389 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33391 \begin_inset Argument 1
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33395 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33402 \begin_inset Index idx
33405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33415 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33424 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33425 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33426 uses in the background.
33427 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33428 is based on commands, you can
33429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33437 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33438 any time if you know the right commands.
33439 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33440 is the end of the day.
33441 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33442 all caption labels bold.
33443 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33445 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33449 \begin_layout Standard
33450 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33452 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33454 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33457 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33467 \begin_layout Standard
33468 As result you find that the package
33473 \begin_inset Index idx
33476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33484 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33489 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33501 \begin_layout Standard
33506 usepackage[options]{package name}
33509 \begin_layout Standard
33510 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33511 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33512 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33513 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33516 \begin_layout Standard
33517 In your case the package name is
33522 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33527 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33528 So you add the command
33531 \begin_layout Standard
33536 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33539 \begin_layout Standard
33540 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33545 For more commands provided by the
33549 package, have a look at its documentation,
33550 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33565 \begin_layout Standard
33566 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33568 For example if you use a
33572 class, you don't need the package
33576 , you can instead write
33579 \begin_layout Standard
33584 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33590 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33591 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33592 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33599 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33602 \begin_layout Standard
33603 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33604 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33606 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33607 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33608 Code box as described in the previous
33612 \begin_layout Standard
33613 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33614 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33619 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33627 \begin_layout Standard
33628 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33634 \begin_layout Standard
33638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 \begin_inset Note Note
33651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33652 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33660 \begin_layout Left Header
33661 \begin_inset Argument 1
33664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33684 \begin_inset Note Note
33687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33688 defines the header line as described below
33696 \begin_layout Center Header
33697 \begin_inset Argument 1
33700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33709 \begin_layout Right Header
33710 \begin_inset Argument 1
33713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33734 \begin_layout Left Footer
33735 \begin_inset Argument 1
33738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33759 \begin_layout Center Footer
33760 \begin_inset Argument 1
33763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33775 \begin_inset Newline newline
33779 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33785 \begin_layout Right Footer
33786 \begin_inset Argument 1
33789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33811 \begin_layout Section
33812 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33815 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33820 \begin_inset Index idx
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33824 Document ! Header/Footer line
33830 \begin_inset Index idx
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33842 \begin_layout Standard
33843 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33847 \begin_inset space ~
33858 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33864 \begin_inset space ~
33870 As a second step add in the menu
33872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33873 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33882 Custom Header/Footerlines
33885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33889 This module offers the following 6
33890 \begin_inset space ~
33896 \begin_layout Description
33898 \begin_inset space ~
33902 \begin_inset space ~
33906 \begin_inset space ~
33910 \begin_inset space ~
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33920 \begin_layout Description
33922 \begin_inset space ~
33926 \begin_inset space ~
33930 \begin_inset space ~
33934 \begin_inset space ~
33938 \begin_inset space ~
33944 \begin_layout Standard
33945 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33946 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33949 \begin_layout Standard
33950 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33951 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33959 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33963 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33966 \begin_layout Standard
33967 \begin_inset Float figure
33973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33976 \begin_inset Tabular
33977 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33978 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33979 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33980 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33981 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34001 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34041 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34045 The normal text on the page goes here.
34046 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34048 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34049 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34054 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34063 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34092 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34121 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34139 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34144 name "fig:Page-layout"
34148 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34161 \begin_layout Standard
34162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34170 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34174 \begin_inset space ~
34179 is set to “Default”.
34180 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34189 \begin_layout Subsection
34193 \begin_layout Standard
34194 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34195 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34196 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34197 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34199 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34201 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34204 \begin_layout Standard
34205 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34206 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34212 \begin_inset space ~
34220 \begin_layout Description
34223 thepage prints the current page number
34226 \begin_layout Description
34229 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34232 \begin_layout Description
34235 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34238 \begin_layout Description
34241 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34242 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34249 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34252 because it usually goes in a left header.
34255 \begin_layout Description
34258 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34259 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34261 It is normally used in the right header.
34264 \begin_layout Subsection
34265 Default header/footer
34268 \begin_layout Standard
34269 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34270 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34271 footer has the page number.
34272 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34273 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34274 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34277 \begin_inset space ~
34285 \begin_layout Subsection
34289 \begin_layout Standard
34290 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34291 Some pages are different.
34292 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34293 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34294 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34295 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34296 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34300 Header and footer decoration line
34303 \begin_layout Standard
34304 By default, you get a 0.4
34305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34308 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34309 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34321 in the following way:
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34331 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34334 \begin_layout Standard
34335 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34348 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34355 \begin_layout Standard
34356 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34358 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34359 \begin_inset space ~
34363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34374 Several header/footer lines
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34378 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34379 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34380 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34382 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34398 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34400 \begin_inset space ~
34408 \begin_layout Standard
34415 headheight}{height}
34418 \begin_layout Standard
34423 is a size in standard units (e.
34424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34428 \begin_inset space \space{}
34436 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34437 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34438 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34439 logfile with the menu
34441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34443 \begin_inset space ~
34451 \begin_inset space ~
34456 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34461 \begin_inset Index idx
34464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34466 packages ! fancyhdr
34472 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34473 for your header/footer.
34476 \begin_layout Subsection
34480 \begin_layout Standard
34481 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34482 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34483 This example consists of the following definition:
34486 \begin_layout Description
34488 \begin_inset space ~
34497 , empty optional argument
34500 \begin_layout Description
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34505 Header empty, empty optional argument
34508 \begin_layout Description
34510 \begin_inset space ~
34519 in the optional argument
34522 \begin_layout Description
34524 \begin_inset space ~
34533 in the optional argument
34536 \begin_layout Description
34538 \begin_inset space ~
34551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34555 \begin_inset Newline newline
34559 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34566 in the optional argument
34569 \begin_layout Description
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34580 , empty optional argument
34583 \begin_layout Description
34586 headrulewidth set to 2
34587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34593 \begin_layout Standard
34594 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34595 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34601 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34611 \begin_layout Standard
34612 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34618 \begin_layout Standard
34622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34626 pagestyle{headings}
34632 \begin_inset Note Note
34635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34636 switches back to page style with the default headings
34644 \begin_layout Section
34645 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34648 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34653 \begin_inset Index idx
34656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34663 \begin_inset Index idx
34666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34675 \begin_layout Standard
34677 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34678 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34679 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34682 \begin_layout Subsection
34686 \begin_layout Standard
34687 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34693 \begin_inset Index idx
34696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34698 packages ! preview-latex
34703 (on some systems named simply
34708 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34710 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34717 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34719 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34727 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34728 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34729 -package are automatically
34730 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34734 \begin_layout Subsection
34738 \begin_layout Standard
34739 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34740 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34742 activate the option
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34752 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34758 \begin_inset space ~
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34765 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34772 \begin_inset space ~
34785 \begin_inset space ~
34790 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34793 \begin_layout Standard
34794 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34807 \begin_inset space ~
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34816 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34817 and when you finish
34821 \begin_layout Standard
34822 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34830 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34831 generated by activating the option
34834 \begin_inset space ~
34840 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34848 \begin_layout Subsection
34849 Selected document parts
34852 \begin_layout Standard
34853 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34854 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34855 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34856 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34858 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34864 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34865 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34866 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34869 \begin_layout Standard
34870 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34877 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34889 is explained in section
34891 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34896 \begin_inset space ~
34906 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34907 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34908 the final rotated boxes,
34909 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34910 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34912 Here is the result:
34915 \begin_layout Standard
34916 \begin_inset Preview
34918 \begin_layout Standard
34923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34933 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34943 height_special "totalheight"
34948 backgroundcolor "none"
34951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34976 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34982 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35004 \begin_layout Standard
35005 Previewing works also for colors.
35006 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35025 is explained in section
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35045 \begin_layout Standard
35046 \begin_inset Preview
35048 \begin_layout Standard
35052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35071 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35076 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35095 \begin_layout Standard
35096 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35102 \begin_layout Standard
35103 If \SpecialChar LyX
35104 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35105 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35106 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35107 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35108 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35109 the \SpecialChar TeX
35111 If \SpecialChar LyX
35112 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35113 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35115 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35116 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35117 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35120 \begin_layout Subsection
35125 \begin_layout Standard
35126 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35127 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35130 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35132 \begin_inset space ~
35137 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35139 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35141 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35142 's main window, then only this selection
35143 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35144 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35145 the source view window.
35150 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35151 ; but note that if you have
35152 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35154 not just the one which is open at the time.
35157 \begin_layout Section
35158 Advanced Find and Replace
35159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35161 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35166 \begin_inset Index idx
35169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35176 \begin_inset Index idx
35179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35188 \begin_layout Subsection
35192 \begin_layout Standard
35193 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35194 allows for searching of complex,
35195 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35197 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35198 The key-features are:
35201 \begin_layout Itemize
35202 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35203 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35204 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35208 \begin_layout Itemize
35209 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35210 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35211 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35212 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35215 \begin_layout Itemize
35216 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35217 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35218 outside of mathematics environments
35221 \begin_layout Itemize
35222 Search may be widened to a specific
35227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35231 \begin_inset space ~
35234 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35235 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35242 \begin_layout Itemize
35243 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35244 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35252 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35255 \begin_layout Subsection
35259 \begin_layout Standard
35260 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35262 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35275 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35278 ) or the toolbar button
35281 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35287 Advanced Find and Replace
35292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35296 \begin_layout Standard
35302 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35311 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35314 arg "paragraph-break"
35318 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35319 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35323 arg "paragraph-break"
35326 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35330 searches backwards.
35333 \begin_layout Standard
35337 \begin_inset space ~
35342 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35356 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35360 Searching for mathematics
35363 \begin_layout Standard
35364 Mathematical formulas, such as
35365 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35368 or something more complex like
35369 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35372 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35377 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35378 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35379 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35380 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35392 This is done by switching to the
35396 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35401 This way, entering in the
35408 \begin_layout Itemize
35409 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35410 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35413 \begin_layout Itemize
35414 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35415 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35418 \begin_layout Itemize
35419 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35420 of it only within section headings.
35421 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35422 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35426 \begin_layout Itemize
35427 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35428 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35435 \begin_layout Standard
35436 The entries made in the
35440 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35443 \begin_inset space ~
35449 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35453 button or alternatively press
35456 arg "paragraph-break"
35463 while the cursor is in the
35466 \begin_inset space ~
35474 \begin_layout Standard
35475 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35477 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35481 \begin_layout Itemize
35482 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35483 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35491 with its typewriter version
35492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35506 \begin_layout Itemize
35507 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35513 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35525 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35532 (you may want to enable the
35535 \begin_inset space ~
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35548 options and disable the
35556 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35564 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35565 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35569 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35572 , or occurrences of
35573 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35577 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35583 \begin_layout Subsection
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35588 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35593 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35595 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35597 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35607 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35613 This is done with the context menu
35615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35616 Insert Regular Expression
35618 while the cursor is in the
35623 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35624 expression matching rules
35628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35629 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35636 \begin_inset space ~
35639 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35640 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35646 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35647 same text in the document.
35648 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35649 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35652 \begin_layout Enumerate
35653 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35658 editor the fraction
35659 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35663 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35666 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35667 fractions with the given denominator.
35670 \begin_layout Enumerate
35671 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35683 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35688 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35689 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35690 Also, by inserting a
35691 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35694 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35695 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35698 \begin_layout Standard
35699 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35700 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35701 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35704 , and referring back to them through
35705 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35709 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35713 For example, try searching with the regexp
35714 \begin_inset Newline newline
35717 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35720 \begin_inset Newline newline
35723 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35726 \begin_layout Standard
35727 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35730 \begin_layout Standard
35731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35739 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35740 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35741 sub-expressions is absolute.
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35747 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35750 always refers to the first occurrence of
35751 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35754 in all entered regexps.
35762 \begin_layout Section
35764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35766 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35771 \begin_inset Index idx
35774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35783 \begin_layout Standard
35785 has a built-in spell checker.
35788 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35795 key or the toolbar button
35798 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35801 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35802 beginning of the currently selected text.
35803 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35804 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35805 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35806 scrolled so that it is visible.
35807 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35808 n, if any could be found.
35809 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35813 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35814 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35817 \begin_layout Standard
35818 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35825 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35826 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35828 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35829 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35832 \begin_inset space ~
35840 arg "dialog-show character"
35843 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35845 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35848 \begin_layout Standard
35849 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35850 can be downloaded from here:
35851 \begin_inset Newline newline
35855 \begin_inset Flex URL
35858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35860 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35866 \begin_inset Newline newline
35870 \begin_inset space ~
35873 files for each language.
35874 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35875 \begin_inset space ~
35878 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35879 's installation subfolder
35887 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35889 \begin_inset Newline newline
35892 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35893 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35894 but in most cases these are
35910 is the language code.
35913 \begin_layout Subsection
35917 \begin_layout Standard
35920 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35921 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35923 \begin_inset space ~
35926 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35929 you can set the following things:
35932 \begin_layout Description
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35937 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35938 should use for spell checking.
35939 Depending on your platform,
35953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35954 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35955 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35973 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35976 \begin_layout Description
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35981 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35982 will always use the given language
35983 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35986 \begin_layout Description
35988 \begin_inset space ~
35991 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35997 \begin_inset space \space{}
36001 This should normally not be needed.
36004 \begin_layout Description
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36013 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36025 \begin_layout Description
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36030 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36031 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36032 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36033 appear in a context menu.
36034 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36038 \begin_layout Description
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_inset space ~
36051 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36055 \begin_layout Section
36057 \begin_inset Index idx
36060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36069 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36076 \begin_layout Standard
36078 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36079 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36089 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36091 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36101 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36103 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36104 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36105 which are available for many languages.
36108 \begin_layout Standard
36109 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36110 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36114 \begin_layout Subsection
36115 Setting up the thesaurus
36118 \begin_layout Standard
36127 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36131 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36136 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36150 For instance, the US English files are named:
36153 \begin_layout Itemize
36157 \begin_layout Itemize
36161 \begin_layout Standard
36170 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36171 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36174 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36175 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36176 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36183 ) to the path where they are installed.
36187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36188 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36189 ies, typical locations are
36195 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36199 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36203 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36206 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36212 LibreOffice-<Version>
36219 On the Mac, the default location is
36221 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36222 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36223 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36224 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36225 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36226 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36234 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36235 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36236 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36240 \begin_layout Standard
36241 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36242 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36246 \begin_layout Itemize
36247 \begin_inset Flex URL
36250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36252 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
36260 \begin_layout Standard
36261 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36262 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36264 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36265 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36266 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36273 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36275 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36276 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36280 \begin_layout Standard
36281 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36283 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36286 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36292 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36295 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36296 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36304 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36305 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36306 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36308 \begin_inset space ~
36313 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36316 \begin_layout Subsection
36317 Using the thesaurus
36320 \begin_layout Standard
36321 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36326 or the toolbar button
36329 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36332 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36334 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36336 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36337 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36338 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36347 ), related terms (such as
36350 \begin_inset space ~
36359 ), compounds (such as
36362 \begin_inset space ~
36371 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36380 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36383 \begin_layout Standard
36384 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36385 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36389 \begin_layout Standard
36390 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36391 the dictionary, such as the above
36395 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36400 \begin_inset space \space{}
36403 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36404 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36405 For example, looking up the word form
36409 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36414 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36419 \begin_inset space \space{}
36430 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36431 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36432 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36435 \begin_layout Section
36437 \begin_inset Index idx
36440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36447 \begin_inset Index idx
36450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36451 Document ! Change Tracking
36457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36459 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36466 \begin_layout Standard
36467 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36468 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36469 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36470 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36477 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_layout Standard
36488 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36502 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36503 You can change the color in
36505 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36506 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36517 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36523 \begin_inset Index idx
36526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36527 Color ! Change tracking
36532 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36533 's status bar when the
36534 cursor is in changed text.
36535 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36538 arg "changes-merge"
36544 \begin_layout Standard
36545 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36547 \begin_inset Index idx
36550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36559 \begin_layout Standard
36560 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36566 \begin_layout Standard
36567 \begin_inset Graphics
36568 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36576 \begin_layout Standard
36577 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36583 \begin_layout Standard
36584 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36587 \begin_layout Standard
36588 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36594 \begin_layout Standard
36595 \begin_inset Tabular
36596 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36597 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36598 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36599 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36609 arg "changes-track"
36617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36625 \begin_inset space ~
36628 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36630 \begin_inset space ~
36639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36648 arg "changes-output"
36656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36664 \begin_inset space ~
36667 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36707 Jumps to the next change
36713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36722 arg "change-accept"
36730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36741 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36761 arg "change-reject"
36769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36777 \begin_inset space ~
36780 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36782 \begin_inset space ~
36791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36800 arg "changes-merge"
36808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36816 \begin_inset space ~
36819 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36839 arg "all-changes-accept"
36847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36855 \begin_inset space ~
36858 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36860 \begin_inset space ~
36864 \begin_inset space ~
36873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36882 arg "all-changes-reject"
36890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36901 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36940 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36942 \begin_inset space ~
36951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36974 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36976 \begin_inset space ~
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36999 \begin_layout Standard
37000 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37020 \begin_layout Standard
37021 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37022 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37023 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37024 the next change after the current cursor position.
37025 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37026 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37027 step to the next change.
37028 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37033 to describe a change.
37036 \begin_layout Standard
37037 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37043 \begin_inset Index idx
37046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37054 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37063 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37067 \begin_layout Section
37068 Comparison of Documents
37069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37071 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37076 \begin_inset Index idx
37079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37080 Comparison of documents
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37089 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37096 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37097 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37099 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37101 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37105 \begin_inset space ~
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37134 \begin_inset space ~
37138 \begin_inset space ~
37142 \begin_inset space ~
37147 enables the change tracking option
37150 \begin_inset space ~
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37163 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37166 \begin_layout Section
37167 International Support
37168 \begin_inset Index idx
37171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37172 International support
37180 \begin_layout Standard
37181 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37182 with any language you want.
37183 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37184 up \SpecialChar LyX
37186 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37188 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
37196 \begin_layout Standard
37197 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37198 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37205 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37212 \begin_layout Subsection
37214 \begin_inset Index idx
37217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37224 \begin_inset Index idx
37227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37228 Document ! Settings
37234 \begin_inset Index idx
37237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37238 Document ! Language
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37249 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37250 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37253 dialog lets you set
37255 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37260 \begin_layout Standard
37265 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37275 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37276 For details about the different encoding options see section
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37283 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37290 \begin_layout Subsection
37291 Keyboard mapping configuration
37292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37294 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37301 \begin_layout Standard
37302 If you have for example a U.
37303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37306 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37307 can use an alternate keymap.
37308 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37313 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37314 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37315 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37318 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37319 \begin_inset space ~
37323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37325 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37330 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37331 which one you want to use.
37334 \begin_layout Standard
37335 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37336 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37337 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37341 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37342 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37343 one to support the characters you want.
37344 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37351 \begin_layout Chapter
37354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37356 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37363 \begin_layout Standard
37364 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37365 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37366 topic inside the user's guide.
37369 \begin_layout Section
37371 \begin_inset Index idx
37374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37383 \begin_layout Standard
37388 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37391 \begin_layout Subsection
37395 \begin_layout Standard
37396 Creates a new document.
37399 \begin_layout Subsection
37403 \begin_layout Standard
37404 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37405 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37406 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37409 \begin_layout Subsection
37413 \begin_layout Standard
37417 \begin_layout Subsection
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37422 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37423 Click there on a file to open it.
37426 \begin_layout Subsection
37430 \begin_layout Standard
37431 Closes the current document.
37434 \begin_layout Subsection
37438 \begin_layout Standard
37439 Closes all opened documents.
37442 \begin_layout Subsection
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 Saves the actual document.
37450 \begin_layout Subsection
37454 \begin_layout Standard
37455 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37458 \begin_layout Subsection
37462 \begin_layout Standard
37463 Saves all opened documents.
37466 \begin_layout Subsection
37470 \begin_layout Standard
37471 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37474 \begin_layout Subsection
37478 \begin_layout Standard
37479 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37480 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37481 It is described in the section
37483 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37488 Additional Features
37493 \begin_layout Subsection
37497 \begin_layout Standard
37498 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37499 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37501 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37502 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37506 \begin_layout Standard
37507 When using the menu entry
37510 \begin_inset space ~
37515 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37519 \begin_inset space ~
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37527 \begin_inset space ~
37532 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37533 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37536 \begin_layout Subsection
37538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37540 name "subsec:Export"
37547 \begin_layout Standard
37548 You can export your document to various file formats.
37549 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37551 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37552 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37553 during its configuration.
37556 \begin_layout Standard
37557 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37565 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37572 \begin_layout Description
37578 \begin_inset space ~
37581 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37586 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37587 \begin_inset Newline newline
37590 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37591 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37595 \begin_layout Description
37596 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37602 \begin_layout Description
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37607 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37613 \begin_layout Description
37614 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37615 's native DVI-format.
37616 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37617 files paths or file names in your document.
37619 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37626 \begin_layout Description
37627 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37628 in files paths or file names
37631 \begin_layout Description
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37640 ) DVI-format using the program
37642 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37645 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37657 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37665 \begin_layout Description
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37670 (cropped) the same as
37674 but with cropped page margins.
37677 \begin_layout Description
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37682 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37686 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37691 \begin_layout Description
37695 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37703 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37711 \begin_layout Description
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37720 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37724 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37732 \begin_layout Description
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37745 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37746 source that is compilable with the program
37748 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37752 \begin_layout Description
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37761 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37762 source, additionally all images used in the document
37763 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37767 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37770 \begin_layout Description
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37779 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37780 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37781 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37789 \begin_layout Description
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37802 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37803 source that is compilable with the program
37809 \begin_layout Description
37811 \begin_inset space ~
37815 \begin_inset space ~
37822 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37823 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37829 \begin_layout Description
37831 \begin_inset space ~
37834 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37835 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37841 \begin_inset space \space{}
37846 \begin_inset space ~
37850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37865 represent the version number)
37868 \begin_layout Description
37870 \begin_inset space ~
37874 \begin_inset space ~
37877 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37878 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37879 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37883 \begin_layout Description
37884 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37885 's internal XHTML engine
37888 \begin_layout Description
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37898 \begin_inset space ~
37902 \begin_inset space ~
37905 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37910 For the conversion the program
37919 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37922 \begin_layout Description
37923 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37928 \begin_layout Description
37930 \begin_inset space ~
37933 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37935 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37938 For the conversion the program
37947 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37950 \begin_layout Description
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37955 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37956 For the conversion the program
37965 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37968 \begin_layout Description
37970 \begin_inset space ~
37973 (cropped) the same as
37976 \begin_inset space ~
37981 but with cropped page margins
37984 \begin_layout Description
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37993 PDF-format using the program
37997 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38000 \begin_layout Description
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38016 \begin_inset space ~
38021 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38026 \begin_inset space \space{}
38029 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38033 \begin_layout Description
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38042 PDF-format using the program
38044 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38047 , produces PDF-files directly
38050 \begin_layout Description
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38059 PDF-format using the program
38063 , produces PDF-files directly
38066 \begin_layout Description
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38075 PDF-format using the program
38079 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38082 \begin_layout Description
38086 \begin_inset space ~
38091 PDF-format using the program
38096 , produces PDF-files directly
38099 \begin_layout Description
38103 \begin_inset space ~
38111 \begin_layout Description
38115 \begin_inset space ~
38119 \begin_inset space ~
38124 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38125 and then exported as text using the program
38130 \begin_layout Description
38135 PostScript format using the program
38143 options see section
38144 \begin_inset space ~
38148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38150 reference "subsec:General-output"
38157 \begin_layout Description
38158 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38159 source and also code in the statistical programming
38173 it is possible to use
38177 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 If one of the menu entries
38189 \begin_inset space ~
38198 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38200 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38202 \begin_inset space ~
38206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38208 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38213 \begin_inset Index idx
38216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38217 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38226 \begin_layout Subsection
38230 \begin_layout Standard
38231 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38232 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38235 \begin_inset space ~
38239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38241 reference "sec:Paths"
38246 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38255 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38256 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38257 's preferences as described in section
38258 \begin_inset space ~
38262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38264 reference "subsec:Converters"
38271 \begin_layout Subsection
38272 New and Close Window
38275 \begin_layout Standard
38276 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38280 \begin_layout Subsection
38284 \begin_layout Standard
38285 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38288 \begin_layout Section
38290 \begin_inset Index idx
38293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 \begin_layout Subsection
38306 \begin_layout Standard
38307 Described in section
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38314 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38321 \begin_layout Subsection
38322 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38325 \begin_layout Standard
38326 Described in section
38327 \begin_inset space ~
38331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38333 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38340 \begin_layout Subsection
38344 \begin_layout Standard
38345 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38346 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38349 \begin_layout Subsection
38353 \begin_layout Standard
38354 Selects the whole document.
38357 \begin_layout Subsection
38358 Find & Replace (Quick)
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38362 Described in section
38363 \begin_inset space ~
38367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38369 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38376 \begin_layout Subsection
38377 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38380 \begin_layout Standard
38381 Described in section
38382 \begin_inset space ~
38386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38395 \begin_layout Subsection
38396 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38399 \begin_layout Standard
38400 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38404 \begin_layout Subsection
38408 \begin_layout Standard
38409 Described in section
38410 \begin_inset space ~
38414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38416 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38423 \begin_layout Subsection
38425 \begin_inset Index idx
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38429 Paragraph ! Settings
38437 \begin_layout Standard
38438 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38439 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38443 \begin_layout Standard
38444 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38445 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38452 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38462 \begin_layout Subsection
38463 Table and Rows & Columns
38466 \begin_layout Standard
38467 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38468 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38469 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38472 \begin_layout Subsection
38476 \begin_layout Standard
38477 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38478 It will dissolve this inset.
38479 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38483 \begin_layout Subsection
38487 \begin_layout Standard
38488 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38489 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38492 \begin_layout Subsection
38493 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38499 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38500 \begin_inset space ~
38504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38506 reference "sec:Nesting"
38511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38513 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38520 \begin_layout Subsection
38523 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38526 \begin_layout Standard
38527 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38528 nts of the same type.
38530 \begin_inset space ~
38534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38536 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38540 for an explanation.
38543 \begin_layout Section
38545 \begin_inset Index idx
38548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38557 \begin_layout Standard
38558 At the bottom of the
38562 menu the opened documents are listed.
38565 \begin_layout Subsection
38566 Open/Close all Insets
38569 \begin_layout Standard
38570 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38573 \begin_layout Subsection
38574 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38577 \begin_layout Standard
38578 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38581 \begin_layout Standard
38582 Math macros are described in the
38589 \begin_layout Subsection
38593 \begin_layout Standard
38594 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38595 \begin_inset space ~
38599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38601 reference "sec:Navigating"
38606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38608 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38615 \begin_layout Subsection
38619 \begin_layout Standard
38620 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38622 \begin_inset space ~
38626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38628 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38635 \begin_layout Subsection
38639 \begin_layout Standard
38640 Opens a window showing console messages.
38641 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38646 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38647 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38648 is processing the document.
38651 \begin_layout Subsection
38653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38655 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38660 \begin_inset Index idx
38663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 \begin_layout Standard
38673 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38674 All toolbars and the
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38682 can be turned on and off.
38687 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38716 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38720 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38727 \begin_layout Standard
38732 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38736 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38737 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38738 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38739 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38740 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38743 \begin_layout Standard
38745 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38746 \begin_inset space ~
38750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38752 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38759 \begin_layout Subsection
38763 \begin_layout Standard
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38771 \begin_inset space ~
38775 \begin_inset space ~
38779 \begin_inset space ~
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38787 \begin_inset space ~
38792 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38793 's main window vertically while
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38800 \begin_inset space ~
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38808 \begin_inset space ~
38812 \begin_inset space ~
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38821 will split it horizontally.
38822 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38823 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38824 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38825 three or more documents at the same time.
38826 To close a split view, use the menu
38829 \begin_inset space ~
38833 \begin_inset space ~
38841 \begin_layout Subsection
38845 \begin_layout Standard
38846 Closes a split view.
38849 \begin_layout Subsection
38853 \begin_layout Standard
38854 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38855 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38856 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38857 's main window fullscreen.
38858 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38859 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38862 \begin_layout Section
38864 \begin_inset Index idx
38867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38876 \begin_layout Subsection
38880 \begin_layout Standard
38881 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38882 \begin_inset space ~
38886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38888 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38899 \begin_layout Subsection
38901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38903 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38910 \begin_layout Standard
38911 Here you can insert the following characters:
38914 \begin_layout Description
38919 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38922 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38923 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38924 -packages you have installed.
38925 You can get a complete display by checking
38928 \begin_inset space ~
38934 \begin_inset Newline newline
38938 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38946 Not all characters will be visible in the
38950 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38951 dialog (see section
38952 \begin_inset space ~
38956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38958 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38962 ) can display every character.
38970 \begin_layout Description
38971 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38975 \begin_layout Description
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38981 \begin_inset space ~
38984 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38991 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38998 \begin_layout Description
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39003 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39007 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39013 \begin_layout Description
39015 \begin_inset space ~
39018 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39022 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39028 \begin_layout Description
39030 \begin_inset space ~
39033 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39037 \begin_layout Description
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39042 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39046 \begin_layout Description
39048 \begin_inset space ~
39051 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39057 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39063 \begin_layout Description
39065 \begin_inset space ~
39068 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39072 \begin_layout Description
39074 \begin_inset space ~
39078 \begin_inset Index idx
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39088 \begin_inset Index idx
39091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39092 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39097 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39098 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39100 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39106 \begin_inset Index idx
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39117 \begin_inset Newline newline
39120 More information about this feature can be found in the
39126 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39132 \begin_layout Description
39133 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39135 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39136 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39140 \begin_layout Subsection
39144 \begin_layout Standard
39145 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39148 \begin_layout Description
39149 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39150 \begin_inset script superscript
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 \begin_layout Description
39162 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
39163 \begin_inset script subscript
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39174 \begin_layout Description
39176 \begin_inset space ~
39179 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
39180 \begin_inset space ~
39184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39186 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
39193 \begin_layout Description
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39198 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
39199 \begin_inset space ~
39203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39205 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
39212 \begin_layout Description
39214 \begin_inset space ~
39217 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
39218 \begin_inset space ~
39222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39224 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
39231 \begin_layout Description
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39236 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
39238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39242 \begin_inset space \space{}
39245 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
39246 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
39252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39255 To insert a fraction use the command
39260 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39264 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39273 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39280 \begin_layout Description
39282 \begin_inset space ~
39285 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39286 \begin_inset space ~
39290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39292 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39299 \begin_layout Description
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39304 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39305 \begin_inset space ~
39309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39311 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39318 \begin_layout Description
39320 \begin_inset space ~
39323 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39330 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39337 \begin_layout Description
39338 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39345 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39352 \begin_layout Description
39354 \begin_inset space ~
39357 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39358 \begin_inset space ~
39362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39364 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39371 \begin_layout Description
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39376 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39377 \begin_inset space ~
39381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39383 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39388 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938048
39392 \begin_layout Description
39394 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938353
39396 \begin_inset space ~
39400 \begin_inset space ~
39403 Break Inserts a line break point (ZWSP) that is invisible in the output.
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39411 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
39418 for a usage example.
39423 \begin_layout Description
39425 \begin_inset space ~
39429 \begin_inset space ~
39432 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39433 \begin_inset space ~
39437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39439 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39446 \begin_layout Description
39448 \begin_inset space ~
39451 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39452 as described in section
39453 \begin_inset space ~
39457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39459 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39466 \begin_layout Description
39468 \begin_inset space ~
39471 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39478 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39485 \begin_layout Description
39487 \begin_inset space ~
39490 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39491 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39493 \begin_inset space ~
39497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39499 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39506 \begin_layout Description
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39511 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39518 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39525 \begin_layout Description
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39534 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39541 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39548 \begin_layout Subsection
39552 \begin_layout Standard
39553 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39557 \begin_inset space ~
39578 are described in section
39579 \begin_inset space ~
39583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39585 reference "sec:toc"
39594 is described in section
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39601 reference "sec:Index"
39609 is described in section
39610 \begin_inset space ~
39614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39616 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39622 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39625 is described in section
39626 \begin_inset space ~
39630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39632 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39639 \begin_layout Subsection
39643 \begin_layout Standard
39644 To insert floats, as described in section
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39651 reference "sec:Floats"
39655 and in detail the chapter
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39670 \begin_layout Subsection
39674 \begin_layout Standard
39675 To insert notes, described in section
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39682 reference "sec:Notes"
39689 \begin_layout Subsection
39693 \begin_layout Standard
39694 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39696 Branches are described in section
39697 \begin_inset space ~
39701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39703 reference "sec:Branches"
39710 \begin_layout Subsection
39714 \begin_layout Standard
39715 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39716 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39718 An example is the document class
39719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39726 with three custom insets.
39729 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39733 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39739 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39742 \begin_layout Subsection
39744 \begin_inset Index idx
39747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 \begin_layout Standard
39757 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39759 For more information see chapter
39761 External Document Parts
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39770 \begin_layout Subsection
39772 \begin_inset Index idx
39775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39784 \begin_layout Standard
39785 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39786 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39805 \begin_layout Standard
39810 dialog as described in section
39811 \begin_inset space ~
39815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39817 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39824 \begin_layout Subsection
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39833 as described in section
39834 \begin_inset space ~
39838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39840 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39847 \begin_layout Subsection
39851 \begin_layout Standard
39856 as described in section
39857 \begin_inset space ~
39861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39863 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39870 \begin_layout Subsection
39872 \begin_inset Index idx
39875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39882 \begin_inset Index idx
39885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39886 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39894 \begin_layout Standard
39895 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39896 Floats are described in section
39897 \begin_inset space ~
39901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39903 reference "sec:Floats"
39907 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39909 Multi-page Captions
39914 \begin_inset space ~
39922 \begin_layout Subsection
39926 \begin_layout Standard
39927 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39928 \begin_inset space ~
39932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39934 reference "sec:Index"
39941 \begin_layout Subsection
39945 \begin_layout Standard
39946 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39953 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39960 \begin_layout Subsection
39964 \begin_layout Standard
39965 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39966 Tables are described in section
39967 \begin_inset space ~
39971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39973 reference "sec:Tables"
39977 and in detail in the chapter
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_layout Subsection
39996 \begin_layout Standard
40002 Graphics are described in section
40003 \begin_inset space ~
40007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40009 reference "sec:Graphics"
40016 \begin_layout Subsection
40020 \begin_layout Standard
40021 Inserts a URL as described in section
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40028 reference "subsec:URLs"
40035 \begin_layout Subsection
40039 \begin_layout Standard
40040 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
40041 \begin_inset space ~
40045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40047 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
40054 \begin_layout Subsection
40058 \begin_layout Standard
40059 Inserts a footnote as described in section
40060 \begin_inset space ~
40064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40066 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40073 \begin_layout Subsection
40077 \begin_layout Standard
40078 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40085 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40092 \begin_layout Subsection
40096 \begin_layout Standard
40097 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40098 title or caption of a float.
40099 Inserts a short title as described in section
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40106 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40113 \begin_layout Subsection
40118 \begin_layout Standard
40119 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40120 Code box as described in section
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40127 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40134 \begin_layout Subsection
40136 \begin_inset Index idx
40139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40148 \begin_layout Standard
40149 Inserts a program listings box.
40150 Program listings are explained in the chapter
40152 Program Code Listings
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40165 \begin_layout Subsection
40169 \begin_layout Standard
40170 Inserts the actual date.
40171 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
40176 \begin_layout Subsection
40180 \begin_layout Standard
40181 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40188 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40195 \begin_layout Section
40197 \begin_inset Index idx
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40209 \begin_layout Standard
40210 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
40211 \begin_inset space ~
40214 of the current document.
40215 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
40218 \begin_layout Subsection
40222 \begin_layout Standard
40223 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
40224 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
40225 to jump, for example, between section
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40234 2.5 and use the submenu
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_inset space ~
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40258 \begin_inset space ~
40264 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
40268 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
40274 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
40277 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40280 \begin_layout Standard
40281 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40285 \begin_inset space ~
40290 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40298 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40301 \begin_layout Subsection
40302 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40305 \begin_layout Standard
40306 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40310 \begin_layout Subsection
40314 \begin_layout Standard
40315 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40316 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40317 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40325 \begin_inset space ~
40333 \begin_layout Subsection
40337 \begin_layout Standard
40338 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40341 The \SpecialChar LyX
40342 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40357 manual for a detailed description.
40360 \begin_layout Section
40362 \begin_inset Index idx
40365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40374 \begin_layout Subsection
40378 \begin_layout Standard
40379 Change Tracking is described in section
40380 \begin_inset space ~
40384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40386 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40393 \begin_layout Subsection
40401 \begin_layout Standard
40402 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40403 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40404 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40406 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40407 to the clipboard or update the view.
40408 \begin_inset Newline newline
40411 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40415 \begin_layout Standard
40418 Open Containing Directory
40420 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40421 's temporary folder for the document.
40422 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40423 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40424 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40425 For example some journals require to send the
40429 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40433 \begin_layout Subsection
40434 Start Appendix Here
40437 \begin_layout Standard
40438 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40439 as described in section
40440 \begin_inset space ~
40444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40446 reference "sec:Appendices"
40453 \begin_layout Subsection
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40461 \begin_layout Standard
40462 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40463 default output format for the document (menu
40465 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40466 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40467 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40469 \begin_inset space ~
40473 \begin_inset space ~
40479 \begin_inset space ~
40483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40485 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40489 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40492 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40493 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40495 \begin_inset space ~
40498 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40503 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40521 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40525 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40526 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40528 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40529 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40531 \begin_inset space ~
40534 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40536 \begin_inset space ~
40539 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40549 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40554 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40555 when it is first configured.
40556 The default output format is
40559 \begin_inset space ~
40567 \begin_layout Subsection
40568 View (Other Formats)
40571 \begin_layout Standard
40572 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40573 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40574 actual document with an external program.
40575 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40576 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40577 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40579 All possible formats are listed in section
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40586 reference "subsec:Export"
40591 You should at least see the menu entry
40596 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40598 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40606 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40611 \begin_inset Index idx
40614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40615 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40624 \begin_layout Standard
40625 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40626 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40628 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40629 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40631 \begin_inset space ~
40634 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40636 \begin_inset space ~
40639 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40649 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40654 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40655 when it is first configured.
40658 \begin_layout Subsection
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40666 \begin_layout Standard
40667 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40668 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40671 \begin_layout Subsection
40672 Update (Other Formats)
40675 \begin_layout Standard
40676 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40677 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40680 \begin_layout Subsection
40681 View Master Document
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40685 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40706 manual for more information on this topic).
40707 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40708 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40721 generates the output of the whole book, while
40725 will just output the chapter alone.
40728 \begin_layout Standard
40729 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40730 in the document settings (menu
40732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40734 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40752 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40756 ) or in the preferences (menu
40758 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40759 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40764 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40769 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40771 \begin_inset space ~
40775 \begin_inset space ~
40781 \begin_inset space ~
40785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40787 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40794 \begin_layout Subsection
40795 Update Master Document
40798 \begin_layout Standard
40799 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40815 \begin_inset space ~
40820 manual for more information on this topic).
40821 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40822 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40825 \begin_layout Standard
40826 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40827 in the document settings (menu
40829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40830 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40831 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40849 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40853 ) or in the preferences (menu
40855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40856 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40858 \begin_inset space ~
40861 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40866 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40872 \begin_inset space ~
40878 \begin_inset space ~
40882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40884 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40891 \begin_layout Subsection
40893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40895 name "subsec:Compressed"
40902 \begin_layout Standard
40903 Un/compresses the current document.
40904 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40905 compression (see the
40907 Additional Features
40909 manual for details).
40912 \begin_layout Subsection
40916 \begin_layout Standard
40917 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40920 \begin_layout Subsection
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40925 The document settings are described in appendix
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40932 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40939 \begin_layout Section
40941 \begin_inset Index idx
40944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40953 \begin_layout Subsection
40957 \begin_layout Standard
40958 Spell checking is explained in section
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40965 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40972 \begin_layout Subsection
40976 \begin_layout Standard
40977 The thesaurus is described in section
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40984 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40991 \begin_layout Subsection
40993 \begin_inset Index idx
40996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41003 \begin_inset Index idx
41006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41015 \begin_layout Standard
41016 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
41017 the highlighted document part.
41020 \begin_layout Subsection
41026 \begin_inset Index idx
41029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41039 \begin_layout Standard
41040 Generates with the help of the program
41042 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41045 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
41046 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
41047 This feature is not available on Windows.
41050 \begin_layout Subsection
41056 \begin_inset Index idx
41059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41069 \begin_layout Standard
41070 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41080 to see the full filename paths.
41083 \begin_layout Subsection
41085 \begin_inset Index idx
41088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41097 \begin_layout Standard
41098 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41099 files as described in section
41100 \begin_inset space ~
41104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41106 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41113 \begin_layout Subsection
41115 \begin_inset Index idx
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41131 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41149 \begin_inset Index idx
41152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41153 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41162 \begin_layout Standard
41163 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
41164 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
41165 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41166 -packages and programs it needs; see
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41174 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41181 \begin_layout Subsection
41185 \begin_layout Standard
41190 dialog as described in detail in appendix
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41197 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41204 \begin_layout Section
41206 \begin_inset Index idx
41209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41218 \begin_layout Standard
41219 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
41220 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
41222 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
41226 \begin_layout Standard
41230 \begin_inset space ~
41235 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
41236 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41237 packages and classes found
41238 by \SpecialChar LyX
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41246 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
41253 \begin_layout Standard
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41262 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
41267 \begin_layout Section
41269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41271 name "sec:Toolbars"
41278 \begin_layout Standard
41279 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41280 \begin_inset space ~
41284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41286 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41293 \begin_layout Standard
41294 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41295 This is described in the
41297 Additional Features
41302 \begin_layout Subsection
41304 \begin_inset Index idx
41307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41316 \begin_layout Standard
41317 \begin_inset Graphics
41318 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41326 \begin_layout Standard
41327 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41333 \begin_layout Standard
41334 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41351 \begin_inset Note Note
41354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41355 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41360 manual for more information.
41368 \begin_layout Standard
41369 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41375 \begin_layout Standard
41376 \begin_inset Tabular
41377 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41378 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41379 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41380 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41386 \begin_inset Graphics
41387 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41401 pull-down box for the environments
41414 \begin_layout Standard
41415 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41421 \begin_layout Standard
41423 \begin_inset Tabular
41424 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41425 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41426 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41427 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41451 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41481 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41511 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41527 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41541 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41557 arg "spelling-continuously"
41565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41569 Spellcheck continuously
41575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41598 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41628 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41658 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41688 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41718 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41734 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41774 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41788 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41830 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41831 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41859 Emphasize text, function of the
41861 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41866 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41896 Set text to noun style, function of the
41898 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41903 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41921 arg "textstyle-apply"
41929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41933 Format text using the current settings in the
41935 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41940 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41972 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41973 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41993 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
42001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42021 arg "tabular-insert"
42029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42051 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42063 Toggle outline window on/off,
42065 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42081 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42093 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42108 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
42116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 Toggle table toolbar on/off
42133 \begin_layout Subsection
42135 \begin_inset Index idx
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42147 \begin_layout Standard
42148 \begin_inset Graphics
42149 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
42157 \begin_layout Standard
42158 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42164 \begin_layout Standard
42165 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42169 \begin_layout Standard
42170 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42176 \begin_layout Standard
42177 \begin_inset Tabular
42178 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
42179 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42180 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42181 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42218 arg "layout Enumerate"
42226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42245 arg "layout Itemize"
42253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42299 arg "layout Description"
42307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42326 arg "depth-increment"
42334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42364 arg "depth-decrement"
42372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42378 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42380 \begin_inset space ~
42384 \begin_inset space ~
42393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42402 arg "float-insert figure"
42410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42417 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 arg "float-insert table"
42441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42448 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42478 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42494 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42524 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42570 \begin_inset space ~
42579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42588 arg "nomencl-insert"
42596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42622 arg "footnote-insert"
42630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42652 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42701 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42721 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42815 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42830 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42837 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42846 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42861 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42863 \begin_inset space ~
42872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42881 arg "dialog-show character"
42889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42897 \begin_inset space ~
42900 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42916 arg "layout-paragraph"
42924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42930 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42950 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42978 \begin_layout Subsection
42979 View/Update Toolbar
42980 \begin_inset Index idx
42983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42984 Toolbar ! View / Update
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42993 \begin_inset Graphics
42994 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
43001 \begin_layout Standard
43002 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43009 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43013 \begin_layout Standard
43014 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43021 \begin_inset Tabular
43022 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
43023 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43024 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43025 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43065 arg "buffer-update"
43073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43095 arg "master-buffer-view"
43103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43111 \begin_inset space ~
43120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43129 arg "master-buffer-update"
43137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43149 \begin_inset space ~
43158 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43167 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
43175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43181 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43182 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43183 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43184 Synchronize with Output
43190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43214 View (Other Formats)
43220 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43227 arg "update-others"
43235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43241 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43242 Update (Other Formats)
43255 \begin_layout Standard
43256 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
43260 \begin_layout Subsection
43264 \begin_layout Standard
43265 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43272 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43276 , the table toolbar
43277 \begin_inset Index idx
43280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43289 \begin_inset space ~
43294 manual and the math macro toolbar
43295 \begin_inset Index idx
43298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43311 \begin_layout Chapter
43312 The Document Settings
43313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43315 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43320 \begin_inset Index idx
43323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43324 Document ! Settings
43332 \begin_layout Standard
43336 \begin_inset space ~
43341 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43342 is called with the menu
43344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43348 You can save your document settings as default with the
43350 Save as Document Defaults
43352 button in any dialog.
43353 This will create a template named
43357 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43358 when you create a new document without
43362 \begin_layout Standard
43367 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43368 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43371 \begin_layout Standard
43372 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43373 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43374 to find the one you are looking for.
43375 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43376 the submenus of the dialog.
43378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43382 \begin_inset space \space{}
43386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43393 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43394 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43395 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43398 \begin_layout Section
43402 \begin_layout Standard
43403 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43405 Document classes are described in section
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43412 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43420 \begin_layout Standard
43424 \begin_inset space ~
43429 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43434 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43435 as a layout for a document class.
43436 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43438 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43447 \begin_layout Standard
43448 Some classes use special class options by default.
43449 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43453 and you can decide to use them or not.
43454 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43455 recommended you leave them untouched.
43460 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43461 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43466 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43468 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43475 \begin_inset Newline newline
43480 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43483 \begin_inset Newline newline
43486 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43487 distribution, see section
43492 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43494 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43507 \begin_layout Standard
43512 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43513 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43514 in the background if the child document
43515 is opened without its master.
43516 This way child documents are always compilable.
43517 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43524 \begin_inset space ~
43532 \begin_layout Standard
43533 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43544 \begin_inset Index idx
43547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 packages ! prettyref
43555 \begin_inset Index idx
43558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43560 packages ! refstyle
43565 for cross-references, see section
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43572 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43579 \begin_layout Section
43583 \begin_layout Standard
43584 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43585 Please refer to the section
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43601 manual for details.
43604 \begin_layout Section
43608 \begin_layout Standard
43609 Modules are explained in section
43610 \begin_inset space ~
43614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43616 reference "subsec:Modules"
43623 \begin_layout Section
43627 \begin_layout Standard
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43635 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43642 \begin_layout Section
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43647 The document font settings are described in section
43648 \begin_inset space ~
43652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43654 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43661 \begin_layout Section
43665 \begin_layout Standard
43666 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43678 \begin_inset space ~
43683 and whether it should be a
43686 \begin_inset space ~
43691 can also be specified here.
43694 \begin_layout Standard
43695 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43696 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43697 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43699 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43702 \begin_layout Standard
43705 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43708 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43709 justifies the text on screen.
43710 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43714 \begin_layout Section
43718 \begin_layout Standard
43719 This dialog is described in sections
43720 \begin_inset space ~
43724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43726 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43733 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43740 \begin_layout Section
43744 \begin_layout Standard
43745 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43752 reference "subsec:Margins"
43759 \begin_layout Section
43761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43763 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43768 \begin_inset Index idx
43771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43772 Language ! Encoding
43780 \begin_layout Standard
43781 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43782 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43783 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43785 is always encoded in utf8).
43786 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43787 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43788 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43789 -command is not known for
43790 a particular character).
43793 \begin_layout Standard
43794 If you use the option
43799 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43800 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43801 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43803 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43804 exactly one encoding.
43805 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43808 \begin_layout Standard
43810 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43811 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43812 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43813 installation supports Unicode), choose
43814 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43815 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43816 is quite incomplete, so
43817 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43822 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43823 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43824 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43825 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43826 -commands is not used, because all
43827 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43828 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43829 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43830 , two new alternative engines
43831 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43833 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43835 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43866 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43871 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43875 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43878 \begin_layout Standard
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43887 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43888 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43898 The possible settings are:
43901 \begin_layout Description
43902 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43904 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43905 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43915 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43922 \begin_layout Description
43923 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43924 format you will use.
43925 In many cases this will be
43930 \begin_inset Index idx
43933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43941 If the newer package
43946 \begin_inset Index idx
43949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43951 packages ! polyglossia
43956 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43957 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43958 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43960 this package will be used instead of
43967 \begin_layout Description
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43980 would be more appropriate.
43983 \begin_layout Description
43984 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43985 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43989 (for German texts), type in
43992 \begin_inset Newline newline
43997 usepackage{ngerman}
44000 \begin_layout Description
44001 None will not use a language package.
44002 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
44005 \begin_layout Standard
44006 Here is a list with the important encodings:
44009 \begin_layout Description
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44026 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44032 \begin_inset Index idx
44035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44037 packages ! inputenc
44043 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
44044 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
44045 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
44049 \begin_layout Description
44050 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
44052 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
44053 commands, which may result in a big
44054 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44055 -commands are needed.
44058 \begin_layout Description
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44067 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
44070 \begin_layout Description
44072 \begin_inset space ~
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44079 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
44082 \begin_layout Description
44084 \begin_inset space ~
44087 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
44090 \begin_layout Description
44092 \begin_inset space ~
44096 \begin_inset space ~
44099 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44100 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44103 \begin_layout Description
44105 \begin_inset space ~
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44112 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
44116 \begin_layout Description
44118 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44125 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
44126 ISO-8859-13 encoding
44129 \begin_layout Description
44131 \begin_inset space ~
44135 \begin_inset space ~
44139 \begin_inset space ~
44142 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
44143 \begin_inset space ~
44149 \begin_layout Description
44151 \begin_inset space ~
44155 \begin_inset space ~
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44162 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
44163 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
44166 \begin_layout Description
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44172 \begin_inset space ~
44175 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
44176 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
44177 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44178 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44189 \begin_layout Description
44191 \begin_inset space ~
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44198 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
44199 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
44200 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44202 should try to use the encoding Unicode
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44213 \begin_layout Description
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44222 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
44225 \begin_layout Description
44227 \begin_inset space ~
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44234 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
44237 \begin_layout Description
44239 \begin_inset space ~
44243 \begin_inset space ~
44246 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
44249 \begin_layout Description
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44254 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
44257 \begin_layout Description
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44262 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
44265 \begin_layout Description
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44271 \begin_inset space ~
44274 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
44277 \begin_layout Description
44279 \begin_inset space ~
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44289 \begin_layout Description
44291 \begin_inset space ~
44295 \begin_inset space ~
44298 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44301 \begin_layout Description
44303 \begin_inset space ~
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44313 \begin_layout Description
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44319 \begin_inset space ~
44322 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44328 \begin_inset Index idx
44331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44338 , when using this, set the document language to
44343 \begin_layout Description
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44349 \begin_inset space ~
44352 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44357 , when using this, set the document language to
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44366 \begin_layout Description
44368 \begin_inset space ~
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44375 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44381 \begin_inset Index idx
44384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44386 packages ! japanese
44391 , when using this, set the document language to
44396 \begin_layout Description
44398 \begin_inset space ~
44402 \begin_inset space ~
44405 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44410 , when using this, set the document language to
44415 \begin_layout Description
44417 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44424 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44429 , when using this, set the document language to
44434 \begin_layout Description
44436 \begin_inset space ~
44439 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44442 \begin_layout Description
44444 \begin_inset space ~
44448 \begin_inset space ~
44452 \begin_inset space ~
44455 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44458 \begin_layout Description
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44468 \begin_inset space ~
44471 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44472 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44473 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44476 \begin_layout Description
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44488 \begin_layout Description
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44497 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44498 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44501 \begin_layout Description
44503 \begin_inset space ~
44507 \begin_inset space ~
44510 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44516 \begin_inset Index idx
44519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44526 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44529 \begin_layout Description
44531 \begin_inset space ~
44539 \begin_inset space ~
44542 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44549 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44552 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44559 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44560 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44562 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44565 \begin_layout Description
44567 \begin_inset space ~
44571 \begin_inset space ~
44574 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44580 \begin_inset Index idx
44583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44590 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44593 \begin_layout Description
44595 \begin_inset space ~
44598 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44604 \begin_inset Index idx
44607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44609 packages ! inputenc
44615 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44619 \begin_layout Description
44621 \begin_inset space ~
44625 \begin_inset space ~
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44632 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44633 \begin_inset space ~
44639 \begin_layout Description
44641 \begin_inset space ~
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44649 \begin_inset space ~
44652 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44653 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44654 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44658 \begin_layout Description
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44664 \begin_inset space ~
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44671 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44672 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44675 \begin_layout Section
44677 \begin_inset Index idx
44680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44687 \begin_inset Index idx
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44697 \begin_inset Index idx
44700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44701 Color ! Shaded boxes
44707 \begin_inset Index idx
44710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44711 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44719 \begin_layout Standard
44720 Here you can alter the font color for the
44724 (default: black), for
44727 \begin_inset space ~
44732 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44736 (default: white) and for
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44749 sets the color back to the default.
44752 \begin_layout Standard
44753 Clicking any button showing
44761 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44762 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44763 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44764 later more quickly.
44767 \begin_layout Standard
44768 Note, if you change the
44771 \begin_inset space ~
44776 font color and use the option
44779 \begin_inset space ~
44784 in the document settings under
44787 \begin_inset space ~
44792 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44793 \begin_inset space ~
44797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44799 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44806 \begin_layout Standard
44807 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44813 \begin_layout Standard
44817 \begin_inset space ~
44826 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44829 \begin_inset space ~
44832 Code after a forced page break:
44835 \begin_layout Itemize
44836 For the page color:
44837 \begin_inset Newline newline
44844 pagecolor{color name}
44847 \begin_layout Itemize
44848 For the text color:
44849 \begin_inset Newline newline
44859 \begin_layout Standard
44860 You are restricted to one of
44896 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44903 \begin_inset space ~
44909 \begin_inset Newline newline
44912 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44913 names to refer to them:
44916 \begin_layout Itemize
44922 \begin_inset Newline newline
44927 page_backgroundcolor
44930 \begin_layout Itemize
44934 \begin_inset space ~
44940 \begin_inset Newline newline
44948 \begin_layout Itemize
44952 \begin_inset space ~
44958 \begin_inset Newline newline
44966 \begin_layout Itemize
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44976 \begin_inset Newline newline
44984 \begin_layout Standard
44985 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44996 \begin_inset space ~
45004 \begin_layout Section
45008 \begin_layout Standard
45009 Here you can adjust the
45013 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
45017 as described in section
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45024 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45031 \begin_layout Section
45035 \begin_layout Standard
45036 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45042 \begin_inset Index idx
45045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45047 packages ! biblatex
45057 \begin_inset Index idx
45060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45072 \begin_inset Index idx
45075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45083 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45086 Sectioned bibliography
45088 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45094 \begin_inset Index idx
45097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45099 packages ! bibtopic
45109 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
45110 Finally, you can select a document-specific
45114 for the generation of the bibliography.
45115 For a further description of these possibilities see section
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45122 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45129 \begin_layout Section
45133 \begin_layout Standard
45134 Here you can define the
45138 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45146 reference "sec:Index"
45153 \begin_layout Section
45157 \begin_layout Standard
45158 The PDF properties are explained in section
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45165 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45172 \begin_layout Section
45176 \begin_layout Standard
45177 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
45178 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45184 \begin_inset Index idx
45187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45199 \begin_inset Index idx
45202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45214 \begin_inset Index idx
45217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45229 \begin_inset Index idx
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45244 \begin_inset Index idx
45247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45249 packages ! mathdots
45259 \begin_inset Index idx
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45264 packages ! mathtools
45274 \begin_inset Index idx
45277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 \begin_inset Index idx
45292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 packages ! stackrel
45304 \begin_inset Index idx
45307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45309 packages ! stmaryrd
45319 \begin_inset Index idx
45322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45324 packages ! undertilde
45329 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45332 \begin_layout Description
45333 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45334 -errors in formulas,
45335 ensure that you have this enabled.
45338 \begin_layout Description
45339 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45340 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45341 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45345 \begin_layout Description
45346 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45361 \begin_layout Description
45362 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45377 \begin_layout Description
45378 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45389 \begin_layout Description
45390 mathtools is used for the math commands
45426 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45433 \begin_layout Description
45434 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45436 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45445 \begin_layout Description
45446 stackrel is used for the math command
45463 \begin_layout Description
45464 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45467 \begin_layout Description
45468 undertilde is used for the math command
45476 Accents for one Character
45485 \begin_layout Section
45489 \begin_layout Standard
45490 The float placement options are described in the section
45493 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_inset space ~
45509 \begin_layout Section
45513 \begin_layout Standard
45514 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45516 Program Code Listings
45521 \begin_inset space ~
45529 \begin_layout Section
45533 \begin_layout Standard
45534 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45542 set to be used and set the
45547 The itemize environment is described in section
45548 \begin_inset space ~
45552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45554 reference "sec:Itemize"
45561 \begin_layout Standard
45562 You can furthermore specify a
45565 \begin_inset space ~
45570 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45571 command of the desired character.
45572 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45579 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45585 \begin_inset space \space{}
45589 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45599 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45600 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45603 \begin_layout Standard
45604 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45612 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45613 -packages in the preamble (menu
45616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45617 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45620 \begin_inset space ~
45626 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45630 usepackage{textcomp}
45633 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45637 usepackage{amssymb}
45647 \begin_layout Section
45651 \begin_layout Standard
45652 Branches are described in section
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45659 reference "sec:Branches"
45666 \begin_layout Section
45668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45670 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45677 \begin_layout Standard
45678 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45681 \begin_layout Description
45683 \begin_inset space ~
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45690 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45710 View Master Document
45711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45718 Update Master Document
45719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45726 menu or the toolbar.
45727 The default is set in
45729 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45730 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45735 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45739 \begin_inset space ~
45743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45745 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45752 \begin_layout Description
45754 \begin_inset space ~
45758 \begin_inset space ~
45761 Output settings for the menu
45763 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45765 \begin_inset space ~
45771 For a detailed description see section
45773 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45778 \begin_inset space ~
45786 \begin_layout Description
45788 \begin_inset space ~
45792 \begin_inset space ~
45795 Options offers settings for the export format
45803 \begin_inset space ~
45808 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45809 \begin_inset space ~
45812 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45816 \begin_inset space ~
45821 settings are described in detail in section
45823 Math Output in XHTML
45828 \begin_inset space ~
45837 \begin_inset space ~
45841 \begin_inset space ~
45846 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45849 \begin_layout Description
45851 \begin_inset space ~
45856 Save transient properties
45858 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45859 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45860 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45864 \begin_layout Itemize
45865 the activation of change tracking
45868 \begin_layout Itemize
45869 the output of tracked changes
45872 \begin_layout Itemize
45873 the recording of the document directory path.
45876 \begin_layout Standard
45877 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45878 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45882 \begin_layout Section
45890 \begin_layout Standard
45891 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45893 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45895 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45897 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45901 \begin_layout Standard
45902 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45903 -syntax is given in section
45904 \begin_inset space ~
45908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45910 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45917 \begin_layout Chapter
45923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45925 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45930 \begin_inset Index idx
45933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 \begin_layout Standard
45943 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45945 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45949 It has the following submenus.
45952 \begin_layout Section
45956 \begin_layout Subsection
45960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45961 User Interface File
45962 \begin_inset Index idx
45965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 Customization ! of toolbars
45972 \begin_inset Index idx
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 Customization ! of menus
45984 \begin_layout Standard
45985 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45986 interface (ui) file.
45987 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45995 \begin_layout Description
46000 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
46003 \begin_layout Description
46010 the menu entries in popup context menus
46013 \begin_layout Description
46018 specifies the toolbar buttons
46021 \begin_layout Standard
46022 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
46023 and edit the entries.
46026 \begin_layout Standard
46027 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
46039 entries must be finished with an explicit
46064 and in the case of the
46065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46077 The syntax for the entries is:
46080 \begin_layout Standard
46081 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46110 \begin_layout Standard
46112 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46115 All the \SpecialChar LyX
46116 -functions are listed in the menu
46118 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46120 \begin_inset space ~
46128 \begin_layout Standard
46129 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46135 \begin_layout Standard
46136 For example, assuming you use the menu
46138 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46141 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
46145 \begin_layout Standard
46146 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46170 \begin_layout Standard
46172 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46187 to have the sixth bookmark.
46190 \begin_layout Standard
46194 \begin_inset space ~
46199 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
46200 's toolbar buttons.
46201 The currently available icon sets are compared in
46202 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46205 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
46213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46217 \begin_layout Standard
46220 Enable tool tips in main work area
46222 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
46226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46230 \begin_layout Standard
46235 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
46236 should display in the menu
46238 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46240 \begin_inset space ~
46248 \begin_layout Subsection
46252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46256 \begin_layout Standard
46259 Restore window layouts and geometries
46262 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46263 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46267 \begin_layout Standard
46270 Restore cursor positions
46272 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46276 \begin_layout Standard
46279 Load opened files from last session
46281 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46285 \begin_layout Standard
46288 Clear all session information
46290 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46291 sessions (cursor positions, names
46292 of last opened documents, etc.).
46295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46299 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46304 \begin_inset Index idx
46307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 \begin_layout Standard
46319 Backup original documents when saving
46321 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46322 it was saved the last time.
46323 It is stored in the
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46332 \begin_inset space ~
46336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46338 reference "sec:Paths"
46342 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46345 \begin_inset space ~
46351 The backup file has the file extension
46352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46366 \begin_layout Standard
46369 Backup documents, every
46371 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46374 \begin_layout Standard
46377 Save documents compressed by default
46379 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46380 \begin_inset space ~
46384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46386 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46391 This applies to newly created documents only.
46392 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46396 Windows & work area
46399 \begin_layout Standard
46402 Open documents in tabs
46404 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46408 \begin_layout Standard
46413 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 \begin_inset space ~
46424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46426 reference "sec:Paths"
46430 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46437 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46438 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46439 of \SpecialChar LyX
46441 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46442 instance is created for each file.
46445 \begin_layout Standard
46448 Single close-tab button
46450 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46460 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46461 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46462 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46466 \begin_layout Standard
46467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46476 before the change takes effect.
46484 \begin_layout Standard
46489 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46491 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46493 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46497 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46498 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46499 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46502 \begin_layout Subsection
46504 \begin_inset Index idx
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46516 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46523 \begin_layout Standard
46524 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46528 \begin_layout Standard
46529 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 This section only deals with the fonts
46541 the \SpecialChar LyX
46543 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46547 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46558 \begin_layout Standard
46559 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46576 (depends on the system) as its
46579 \begin_inset space ~
46595 \begin_layout Standard
46596 You can change the font size with the
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46608 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46613 points have the size of 1
46614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46618 \begin_inset space ~
46622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46624 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46629 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46634 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46635 \begin_inset space ~
46639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46641 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46648 \begin_layout Standard
46651 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46653 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46654 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46655 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46656 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46657 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46659 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46660 \begin_inset space ~
46666 \begin_layout Subsection
46668 \begin_inset Index idx
46671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46672 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46679 \begin_inset Index idx
46682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46691 \begin_layout Standard
46692 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46693 by choosing an item in the
46694 list and selecting the
46701 \begin_layout Standard
46702 By checking the option
46706 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46709 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46710 \begin_inset space ~
46714 \begin_inset space ~
46719 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46722 \begin_layout Subsection
46724 \begin_inset Index idx
46727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46736 \begin_layout Standard
46737 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46741 \begin_layout Standard
46746 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46747 This feature is described in section
46748 \begin_inset space ~
46752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46754 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46761 \begin_layout Standard
46762 Checking the option
46765 \begin_inset space ~
46769 \begin_inset space ~
46773 \begin_inset space ~
46778 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46781 \begin_layout Section
46783 \begin_inset Index idx
46786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46795 \begin_layout Subsection
46799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46803 \begin_layout Standard
46806 Cursor follows scrollbar
46808 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46812 \begin_layout Standard
46813 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46814 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46815 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46818 \begin_layout Standard
46821 Scroll below end of document
46823 is self-explanatory.
46826 \begin_layout Standard
46827 In \SpecialChar LyX
46828 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46835 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46837 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46838 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46841 \begin_layout Standard
46844 Sort environments alphabetically
46846 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46849 \begin_layout Standard
46852 Group environments by their category
46854 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46857 \begin_layout Standard
46862 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46877 \begin_layout Standard
46878 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46883 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46884 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46888 \begin_layout Subsection
46890 \begin_inset Index idx
46893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46900 \begin_inset Index idx
46903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46904 Settings ! Shortcuts
46912 \begin_layout Standard
46917 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46919 Several binding files are available, among them:
46922 \begin_layout Description
46923 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46926 \begin_layout Description
46927 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46939 \begin_layout Description
46940 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46951 \begin_layout Standard
46952 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46957 , and binding files for special languages.
46958 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46963 \begin_inset space \space{}
46967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46975 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46976 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46977 will try to use the appropriate binding
46981 \begin_layout Standard
46982 Some binding files, like
46986 , only have a limited scope.
46987 When looking at the end of the file
46991 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46994 \begin_layout Standard
46998 \begin_inset space ~
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47007 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
47008 in the selected key binding file.
47011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47015 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
47020 \begin_inset Index idx
47023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47024 Key Bindings ! Editing
47032 \begin_layout Standard
47033 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
47034 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
47035 functions and the bound shortcuts.
47036 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
47039 Show key-bindings containing
47042 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
47043 Insert there for example as keyword
47044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47051 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
47052 functions that contain
47053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47061 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
47062 All \SpecialChar LyX
47063 functions are also listed in the file
47068 that you will find in the
47075 \begin_layout Standard
47076 For example, to add the shortcut
47084 , select the function and press the
47089 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
47090 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
47093 \begin_layout Standard
47094 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
47095 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
47097 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
47098 function names as a semicolon separated list.
47100 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
47105 \begin_layout Standard
47106 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
47109 \begin_layout Standard
47110 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
47112 The syntax of the entries is:
47115 \begin_layout Standard
47121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47140 \begin_layout Standard
47141 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
47142 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
47143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47170 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
47171 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
47172 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
47173 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
47175 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
47179 , you needed to specify it as
47184 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
47187 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
47190 \begin_layout Subsection
47192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47194 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47199 \begin_inset Index idx
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47209 \begin_inset Index idx
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47213 Settings ! Keyboard Map
47221 \begin_layout Standard
47222 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
47223 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
47224 provides keyboard maps.
47225 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
47226 is a Romanian one, you can enable
47229 \begin_inset space ~
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47238 and select the keyboard map file named
47245 \begin_layout Standard
47254 keyboard map and, if you use the
47258 bindings, you can select the first and second with
47261 arg "keymap-primary"
47267 arg "keymap-secondary"
47270 respectively or toggle between them with
47273 arg "keymap-toggle"
47279 \begin_layout Standard
47280 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47288 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47297 \begin_layout Standard
47298 You can also specify the mouse
47300 Wheel scrolling speed
47303 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47307 Middle mouse button pasting
47309 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47310 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47313 \begin_layout Standard
47321 \begin_inset space ~
47325 \begin_inset space ~
47330 you can select a key for zooming.
47331 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47334 \begin_layout Subsection
47338 \begin_layout Standard
47339 Input completion is described in section
47340 \begin_inset space ~
47344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47346 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47353 \begin_layout Section
47355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47362 \begin_inset Index idx
47365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47372 \begin_inset Index idx
47375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47384 \begin_layout Standard
47385 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47386 are normally determined during
47388 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47391 \begin_layout Description
47393 \begin_inset space ~
47396 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47397 's working directory.
47398 It is the default when you
47409 \begin_inset space ~
47417 \begin_layout Description
47419 \begin_inset space ~
47422 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47424 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47426 \begin_inset space ~
47430 \begin_inset space ~
47438 \begin_layout Description
47440 \begin_inset space ~
47443 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47449 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47453 \begin_inset Newline newline
47457 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47469 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47470 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47478 \begin_layout Description
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_inset Index idx
47487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47493 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47494 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47495 \begin_inset space ~
47499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47501 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47509 will be used to save the backups.
47510 \begin_inset Newline newline
47513 Backup files have the ending
47514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47524 \begin_layout Description
47526 \begin_inset space ~
47529 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47530 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47532 \begin_inset Newline newline
47539 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47545 You can edit this file with the program
47554 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47555 in its preferences under
47558 \begin_inset space ~
47564 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47569 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47571 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47572 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47578 and \SpecialChar LyX
47579 need to be running the same time.
47580 \begin_inset Newline newline
47583 The pipe is also used for the
47587 feature, see section
47588 \begin_inset space ~
47592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47594 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47599 \begin_inset Newline newline
47602 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47603 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47604 \begin_inset Newline newline
47620 \begin_layout Description
47622 \begin_inset space ~
47625 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47628 \begin_layout Description
47630 \begin_inset space ~
47633 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47634 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47635 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47638 \begin_layout Description
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47643 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47649 You only need to specify it if you are using
47653 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47655 For \SpecialChar LyX
47660 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47664 \begin_layout Description
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47669 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47670 When \SpecialChar LyX
47671 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47672 to find it on the system.
47673 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47675 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47684 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47685 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47688 \begin_layout Description
47690 \begin_inset space ~
47693 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47694 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47695 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47696 code or in the document
47698 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47700 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47701 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47702 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47703 scanned for the input files.
47704 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47705 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47707 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47708 compilation may fail for some documents.
47711 \begin_layout Section
47715 \begin_layout Standard
47716 Here you can insert your
47725 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47727 \begin_inset space ~
47731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47733 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47737 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47740 \begin_layout Section
47742 \begin_inset Index idx
47745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47746 Language ! Settings
47752 \begin_inset Index idx
47755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47756 Settings ! Language
47764 \begin_layout Subsection
47766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47768 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47775 \begin_layout Description
47777 \begin_inset space ~
47781 \begin_inset space ~
47784 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47786 You can find its actual translation status here:
47787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47789 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47797 \begin_layout Description
47799 \begin_inset space ~
47802 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47803 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47804 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47805 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47822 The most widespread language package is
47827 \begin_inset Index idx
47830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47837 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47839 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47840 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47841 come with the alternative
47847 \begin_inset Index idx
47850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47852 packages ! polyglossia
47857 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47858 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47864 The available selections are described in section
47865 \begin_inset space ~
47869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47871 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47878 \begin_layout Description
47880 \begin_inset space ~
47883 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47884 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47885 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47886 An example is the start command
47892 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47894 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47914 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47919 \begin_layout Description
47921 \begin_inset space ~
47929 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47930 command toggles the package on and off.
47933 \begin_layout Description
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47939 \begin_inset space ~
47942 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47946 \begin_layout Description
47948 \begin_inset space ~
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47955 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47959 \begin_layout Description
47961 \begin_inset space ~
47965 \begin_inset space ~
47968 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47969 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47970 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47972 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47979 \begin_layout Description
47981 \begin_inset space ~
47984 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47986 When this option is not set, the
47989 \begin_inset space ~
47994 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47996 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47999 \begin_inset space ~
48007 \begin_layout Description
48009 \begin_inset space ~
48015 \begin_inset space ~
48021 When it is not set, the
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48029 is set to the end of the document.
48032 \begin_layout Description
48034 \begin_inset space ~
48038 \begin_inset space ~
48041 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
48042 language will be underlined in blue.
48045 \begin_layout Description
48047 \begin_inset space ~
48051 \begin_inset space ~
48054 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
48055 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
48058 \begin_layout Description
48060 \begin_inset space ~
48063 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
48064 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
48065 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
48066 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
48069 \begin_layout Subsection
48073 \begin_layout Standard
48074 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
48075 \begin_inset space ~
48079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48081 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48088 \begin_layout Section
48092 \begin_layout Subsection
48094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48096 name "subsec:General-output"
48103 \begin_layout Description
48105 \begin_inset space ~
48108 search Commands that will be used for the menu
48110 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48112 \begin_inset space ~
48118 For a detailed description see section
48120 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48125 \begin_inset space ~
48133 \begin_layout Description
48135 \begin_inset space ~
48138 Options Options for the program
48142 that is used for the export format
48147 \begin_inset space ~
48151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48153 reference "subsec:Export"
48158 Possible options are listed in the
48163 \begin_inset Newline newline
48167 \begin_inset Flex URL
48170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48172 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
48182 \begin_layout Description
48184 \begin_inset space ~
48188 \begin_inset space ~
48191 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
48194 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48195 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
48197 \begin_inset space ~
48203 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
48206 \begin_layout Description
48208 \begin_inset space ~
48212 \begin_inset Index idx
48215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48222 \begin_inset Index idx
48225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48226 Settings ! Date format
48231 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
48232 \begin_inset Newline newline
48236 \begin_inset Flex URL
48239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48241 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
48247 \begin_inset Newline newline
48250 For example the format
48251 \begin_inset Newline newline
48255 \begin_inset Newline newline
48258 prints the date as day/month/year.
48261 \begin_layout Description
48263 \begin_inset space ~
48267 \begin_inset space ~
48270 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
48271 is allowed to overwrite on export.
48274 \begin_layout Subsection
48280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48282 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
48287 \begin_inset Index idx
48290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48291 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48300 \begin_layout Description
48302 \begin_inset space ~
48310 \begin_inset space ~
48314 \begin_inset space ~
48317 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48322 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48343 are used for Cyrillic.
48344 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48357 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48359 sets up in the background.
48360 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48363 \begin_layout Description
48365 \begin_inset space ~
48369 \begin_inset space ~
48373 \begin_inset space ~
48377 \begin_inset space ~
48380 options They only have an effect when the program
48384 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48387 \begin_layout Standard
48388 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48389 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48390 manuals of the applications.
48393 \begin_layout Description
48395 \begin_inset space ~
48398 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48399 \begin_inset space ~
48403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48405 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48412 \begin_layout Description
48414 \begin_inset space ~
48417 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48418 \begin_inset space ~
48422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48424 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48431 \begin_layout Description
48433 \begin_inset space ~
48436 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48437 \begin_inset space ~
48441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48443 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48450 \begin_layout Description
48456 \begin_inset space ~
48459 command Command for the program
48461 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48464 that is described in the section
48466 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48471 Additional Features
48476 \begin_layout Standard
48477 There are additionally the following options:
48480 \begin_layout Description
48482 \begin_inset space ~
48486 \begin_inset space ~
48490 \begin_inset space ~
48494 \begin_inset space ~
48499 \begin_inset space ~
48502 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48520 to separate folders.
48521 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48523 \begin_inset Index idx
48526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48533 \begin_inset Index idx
48536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48545 \begin_layout Description
48547 \begin_inset space ~
48551 \begin_inset space ~
48555 \begin_inset space ~
48559 \begin_inset space ~
48563 \begin_inset space ~
48567 \begin_inset space ~
48570 changes Removes all manually set
48576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48577 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48579 \begin_inset space ~
48584 dialog when changing the document class.
48587 \begin_layout Section
48589 \begin_inset space ~
48593 \begin_inset Index idx
48596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48605 \begin_layout Subsection
48607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48609 name "subsec:Converters"
48614 \begin_inset Index idx
48617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48626 \begin_layout Standard
48627 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48628 from one format to another.
48629 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48630 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48637 \begin_inset space ~
48642 field and press the
48647 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48651 \begin_inset space ~
48656 drop-down list, modify the
48660 field and press the
48667 \begin_layout Standard
48670 Converter File Cache
48676 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48678 Maximum Age (in days
48681 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48682 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48685 \begin_layout Standard
48686 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48687 definition, is described in the section
48698 \begin_layout Subsection
48700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48702 name "sec:File-Formats"
48707 \begin_inset Index idx
48710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48717 \begin_inset Index idx
48720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48729 \begin_layout Standard
48730 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48740 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48743 \begin_layout Standard
48744 You can also define the
48746 Default output format
48748 that is used when you use
48750 View, Update, View Master Document
48754 Update Master Document
48760 menu or the toolbar.
48763 \begin_layout Standard
48764 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48775 \begin_layout Standard
48776 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48778 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48779 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48780 This is done by specifying a
48785 More about this is described in the section
48796 \begin_layout Chapter
48797 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48799 \begin_inset Index idx
48802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48811 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48818 \begin_layout Standard
48820 \begin_inset space ~
48824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48826 reference "tab:Units"
48830 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48831 and used in this documentation.
48834 \begin_layout Standard
48835 \begin_inset Float table
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48842 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48860 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48868 \begin_inset Tabular
48869 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48870 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48872 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48873 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49079 scaled point (65536
49080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49158 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
49162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49231 % of original image width
49236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49547 \begin_layout Chapter
49549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49551 name "chap:Credits"
49558 \begin_layout Standard
49559 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49560 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49563 \begin_layout Itemize
49566 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49569 \begin_layout Itemize
49575 \begin_layout Itemize
49581 \begin_layout Itemize
49587 \begin_layout Itemize
49593 \begin_layout Itemize
49599 \begin_layout Itemize
49605 \begin_layout Itemize
49611 \begin_layout Itemize
49614 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49617 \begin_layout Itemize
49623 \begin_layout Itemize
49629 \begin_layout Itemize
49635 \begin_layout Itemize
49641 \begin_layout Itemize
49647 \begin_layout Itemize
49653 \begin_layout Itemize
49659 \begin_layout Itemize
49665 \begin_layout Itemize
49666 The \SpecialChar LyX
49668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49678 \begin_layout Standard
49679 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49682 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49689 \begin_layout Bibliography
49690 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49691 LatexCommand bibitem
49698 The \SpecialChar LyX
49700 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49703 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49709 \begin_inset Newline newline
49713 \begin_inset Flex URL
49716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49718 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49726 \begin_layout Bibliography
49727 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49728 LatexCommand bibitem
49729 key "latexcompanion"
49734 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49736 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49737 Companion Second Edition.
49740 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49743 \begin_layout Bibliography
49744 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49745 LatexCommand bibitem
49751 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49754 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49758 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49761 \begin_layout Bibliography
49762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49763 LatexCommand bibitem
49772 : A Document Preparation System.
49775 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49778 \begin_layout Bibliography
49779 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49780 LatexCommand bibitem
49790 The \SpecialChar TeX
49794 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49797 \begin_layout Bibliography
49798 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49799 LatexCommand bibitem
49805 The \SpecialChar TeX
49807 \begin_inset Newline newline
49811 \begin_inset Flex URL
49814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49816 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49824 \begin_layout Bibliography
49825 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49826 LatexCommand bibitem
49832 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49834 \begin_inset Newline newline
49838 \begin_inset Flex URL
49841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49843 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49851 \begin_layout Bibliography
49852 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49853 LatexCommand bibitem
49860 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49862 name "Documentation"
49863 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49870 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49874 \begin_inset Newline newline
49878 \begin_inset Flex URL
49881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49883 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49891 \begin_layout Bibliography
49892 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49893 LatexCommand bibitem
49900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49902 name "Documentation"
49903 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49908 how to use the program
49910 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49914 \begin_inset Newline newline
49918 \begin_inset Flex URL
49921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49923 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49931 \begin_layout Bibliography
49932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49933 LatexCommand bibitem
49940 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49942 name "Documentation"
49943 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49948 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49954 \begin_inset Index idx
49957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49959 packages ! biblatex
49965 \begin_inset Newline newline
49969 \begin_inset Flex URL
49972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49974 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49982 \begin_layout Bibliography
49983 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49984 LatexCommand bibitem
49991 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49993 name "Documentation"
49994 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49999 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50005 \begin_inset Index idx
50008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50016 \begin_inset Newline newline
50020 \begin_inset Flex URL
50023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50025 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
50033 \begin_layout Bibliography
50034 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50035 LatexCommand bibitem
50042 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50044 name "Documentation"
50045 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
50055 \begin_inset Newline newline
50059 \begin_inset Flex URL
50062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50064 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
50072 \begin_layout Bibliography
50073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50074 LatexCommand bibitem
50075 key "makeindex-man"
50081 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50084 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
50094 \begin_inset Newline newline
50098 \begin_inset Flex URL
50101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50103 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
50111 \begin_layout Bibliography
50112 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50113 LatexCommand bibitem
50120 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50122 name "Documentation"
50123 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
50133 \begin_inset Newline newline
50137 \begin_inset Flex URL
50140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50142 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
50150 \begin_layout Bibliography
50151 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50152 LatexCommand bibitem
50159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50161 name "Documentation"
50162 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
50167 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
50169 \begin_inset Newline newline
50173 \begin_inset Flex URL
50176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50178 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
50186 \begin_layout Bibliography
50187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50188 LatexCommand bibitem
50195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50197 name "Documentation"
50198 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
50203 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50209 \begin_inset Index idx
50212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50220 \begin_inset Newline newline
50224 \begin_inset Flex URL
50227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50229 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
50237 \begin_layout Bibliography
50238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50239 LatexCommand bibitem
50246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50248 name "Documentation"
50249 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
50254 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50260 \begin_inset Index idx
50263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50265 packages ! enumitem
50271 \begin_inset Newline newline
50275 \begin_inset Flex URL
50278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50280 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
50288 \begin_layout Bibliography
50289 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50290 LatexCommand bibitem
50297 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50299 name "Documentation"
50300 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
50305 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50311 \begin_inset Index idx
50314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50316 packages ! fancyhdr
50322 \begin_inset Newline newline
50326 \begin_inset Flex URL
50329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50331 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
50339 \begin_layout Bibliography
50340 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50341 LatexCommand bibitem
50348 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50350 name "Documentation"
50351 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
50356 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50362 \begin_inset Index idx
50365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50367 packages ! hyperref
50373 \begin_inset Newline newline
50377 \begin_inset Flex URL
50380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50382 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
50390 \begin_layout Bibliography
50391 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50392 LatexCommand bibitem
50399 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50401 name "Documentation"
50402 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50407 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50413 \begin_inset Index idx
50416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50424 \begin_inset Newline newline
50428 \begin_inset Flex URL
50431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50433 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50441 \begin_layout Bibliography
50442 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50443 LatexCommand bibitem
50450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50452 name "Documentation"
50453 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50458 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50464 \begin_inset Index idx
50467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50469 packages ! prettyref
50475 \begin_inset Newline newline
50479 \begin_inset Flex URL
50482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50484 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50492 \begin_layout Bibliography
50493 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50494 LatexCommand bibitem
50501 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50503 name "Documentation"
50504 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50509 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50515 \begin_inset Index idx
50518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50520 packages ! refstyle
50526 \begin_inset Newline newline
50530 \begin_inset Flex URL
50533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50535 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50543 \begin_layout Bibliography
50544 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50545 LatexCommand bibitem
50552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50555 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50560 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50562 \begin_inset Newline newline
50566 \begin_inset Flex URL
50569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50571 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50579 \begin_layout Bibliography
50580 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50581 LatexCommand bibitem
50588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50591 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50596 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50598 \begin_inset Newline newline
50602 \begin_inset Flex URL
50605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50607 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50615 \begin_layout Bibliography
50616 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50617 LatexCommand bibitem
50624 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50627 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50632 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50633 for Cyrillic languages:
50634 \begin_inset Newline newline
50638 \begin_inset Flex URL
50641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50643 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50651 \begin_layout Bibliography
50652 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50653 LatexCommand bibitem
50660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50663 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50668 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50670 \begin_inset Newline newline
50674 \begin_inset Flex URL
50677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50679 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50687 \begin_layout Bibliography
50688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50689 LatexCommand bibitem
50696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50699 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50704 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50706 \begin_inset Newline newline
50710 \begin_inset Flex URL
50713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50715 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50723 \begin_layout Bibliography
50724 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50725 LatexCommand bibitem
50732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50735 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50740 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50742 \begin_inset Newline newline
50746 \begin_inset Flex URL
50749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50751 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50759 \begin_layout Bibliography
50760 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50761 LatexCommand bibitem
50768 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50771 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50776 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50778 \begin_inset Newline newline
50782 \begin_inset Flex URL
50785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50787 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50795 \begin_layout Bibliography
50796 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50797 LatexCommand bibitem
50804 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50807 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50812 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50814 \begin_inset Newline newline
50818 \begin_inset Flex URL
50821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50823 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50831 \begin_layout Bibliography
50832 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50833 LatexCommand bibitem
50840 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50843 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50848 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50850 \begin_inset Newline newline
50854 \begin_inset Flex URL
50857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50859 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50867 \begin_layout Bibliography
50868 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50869 LatexCommand bibitem
50876 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50879 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50884 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50886 \begin_inset Newline newline
50890 \begin_inset Flex URL
50893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50895 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50903 \begin_layout Bibliography
50904 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50905 LatexCommand bibitem
50912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50915 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50920 about new features in
50926 \begin_inset Newline newline
50930 \begin_inset Flex URL
50933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50935 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50943 \begin_layout Standard
50944 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50978 \begin_inset Note Note
50981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50988 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50989 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50990 bibliography is the second one:
50998 \begin_layout Standard
50999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51000 LatexCommand bibtex
51001 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51002 options "biblio/alphadin"
51009 \begin_layout Standard
51010 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51014 \begin_layout Standard
51015 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
51016 LatexCommand printnomenclature
51022 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
51023 LatexCommand printindex